WO2013072758A1 - Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers - Google Patents

Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013072758A1
WO2013072758A1 PCT/IB2012/002504 IB2012002504W WO2013072758A1 WO 2013072758 A1 WO2013072758 A1 WO 2013072758A1 IB 2012002504 W IB2012002504 W IB 2012002504W WO 2013072758 A1 WO2013072758 A1 WO 2013072758A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
pain
pharmaceutically acceptable
solvate
prodrug
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/IB2012/002504
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Bin Shao
Original Assignee
Purdue Pharma L.P.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Purdue Pharma L.P. filed Critical Purdue Pharma L.P.
Priority to AU2012327195A priority Critical patent/AU2012327195B8/en
Priority to US14/358,155 priority patent/US9133131B2/en
Publication of WO2013072758A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013072758A1/en
Priority to US14/817,984 priority patent/US9539253B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06078—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aromatic or cycloaliphatic

Definitions

  • This invention is in the field of medicinal chemistry.
  • the invention provides novel pyrimidine diol amides and the use of these compounds as blockers of voltage- gated sodium (Na + ) channels.
  • VSCs Voltage-gated sodium channels
  • Sodium channels are primarily responsible for generating the rapid upstroke of the action potential in neuronal cells of the central nervous system (CNS) and peripheral nervous system (PNS). In this manner sodium channels are essential to the initiation and propagation of electrical signals in the nervous system. Proper function of sodium channels is therefore necessary for normal function of the neuron.
  • VGSCs are composed of one a-subunit, which forms the core of the channel and is responsible for voltage-dependent gating and ion permeation, and several auxiliary ⁇ -subunits (see, e.g., Chahine et al., CNS & Neurological Disorders-Drug Targets 7: 144-158 (2008) and Kyle and Ilyin, J. Med. Chem. 50:2583-2588 (2007)).
  • a-Subunits are large proteins composed of four homologous domains. Each domain contains six a-helical transmembrane spanning segments.
  • Names for this family include SCNx, SCNAx, and Na v x.x (see Table 1 , below).
  • the VGSC family has been phylogenetically divided into two subfamilies Na v l.x (all but SCN6A) and Na v 2.x (SCN6A).
  • the Na v l.x subfamily can be functionally subdivided into two groups, those which are sensitive to blocking by tetrodotoxin (TTX- sensitive or TTX-s) and those which are resistant to blocking by tetrodotoxin (TTX- resistant or TTX-r).
  • the SCN5A gene product (Na v 1.5, HI) is almost exclusively expressed in cardiac tissue and has been shown to underlie a variety of cardiac arrhythmias and other conduction disorders (Liu et al, Am. J. Pharmacogenomics 3 : 173- 179 (2003)). Consequently, blockers of Na v 1.5 have found clinical utility in treatment of such disorders (Srivatsa et al., Curr. Cardiol. Rep. 4:401 -410 (2002)).
  • TTX-resistant sodium channels Na v 1.8 (SCNIOA, PN3, SNS) and Na v 1.9 (SCNl 1 A, NaN, SNS2) are expressed in the peripheral nervous system and show preferential expression in primary nociceptive neurons.
  • Human genetic variants of these channels have not been associated with any inherited clinical disorder.
  • aberrant expression of Na v 1.8 has been found in the CNS of human multiple sclerosis (MS) patients and also in a rodent model of MS (Black et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 97: 1 1598-1 15602 (2000)).
  • Evidence for involvement in nociception is both associative (preferential expression in nociceptive neurons) and direct (genetic knockout).
  • Na v 1.8-null mice exhibited typical nociceptive behavior in response to acute noxious stimulation but had significant deficits in referred pain and
  • hyperalgesia (Laird et al., J. Neurosci. 22:8352-8356 (2002)).
  • Na v 1.9 SCN 1 1 A PNS 1 ,000 - Pain
  • the Na v 1.7 (PN1, SCN9A) VGSC is sensitive to blocking by tetrodotoxin and is preferentially expressed in peripheral sympathetic and sensory neurons.
  • the SCN9A gene has been cloned from a number of species, including human, rat, and rabbit and shows ⁇ 90 % amino acid identity between the human and rat genes (Toledo-Aral et al curat Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 1527- 1532 (1997)).
  • Sodium channel-blocking agents have been reported to be effective in the treatment of various disease states, and have found particular use as local anesthetics, e.g., lidocaine and bupivacaine, and in the treatment of cardiac arrhythmias, e.g. , propafenone and amiodarone, and epilepsy, e.g., lamotrigine, phenytoin and carbamazepine (see Clare et al., Drug Discovery Today 5:506-5 10 (2000); Lai et al., Annu. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 44:371 -397 (2004); Anger et al., J. Med. Chem.
  • sodium channel-blocking agents can be useful in the treatment of pain, including acute, chronic, inflammatory, neuropathic, and other types of pain such as rectal, ocular, and submandibular pain typically associated with paroxysmal extreme pain disorder; see, for example, Kyle and Ilyin., J. Med. Chem. 50:2583-2588 (2007); Wood et al., J. Neurobiol. 61 :55-71 (2004); Baker et al., TRENDS in Pharmacological Sciences 22:27-31 (2001 ); and Lai et al., Current
  • erthermalgia and paroxysmal extreme pain disorder familial hemiplegic migraine, and movement disorder
  • other psychiatric disorders such as autism, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, and mental retardation; see, for example, Chahine et al., CNS & Neurological Disorders-Drug Targets 7: 144- 158 (2008) and Meisler and Kearney, J. Clin. Invest. 1 15:2010-2017 (2005).
  • carbamazepine, lidocaine and phenytoin are used to treat neuropathic pain, such as from trigeminal neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy and other forms of nerve damage (Taylor and Meldrum, Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 16:309-3 16 ( 1995)).
  • neuropathic pain such as from trigeminal neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy and other forms of nerve damage
  • tinnitus based on a number of similarities between chronic pain and tinnitus, (Moller, Am. J. Otol. 18:577-585 (1997); Tonndorf, Hear. Res. 28:271 -275 ( 1987)
  • tinnitus should be viewed as a form of chronic pain sensation (Simpson, et al., Tip. 20: 12-18 ( 1999)).
  • carbamazepine have been shown to be efficacious in treating tinnitus (Majumdar, B. et al., Clin. Otolaryngol. 8: 175-180 (1983); Donaldson, Laryngol. Otol. 95:947-951 ( 1981 )).
  • the present disclosure provides pyrimidine diol amides represented by Formulae I-VIII, below, and the pharmaceutically acceptable solvates and prodrugs thereof, collectively referred to herein as "Compounds of the
  • the present disclosure provides the use of Compounds of the Invention as blockers of sodium (Na + ) channels.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels in a mammal, comprising 15 administering to the mammal an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for treating pain (e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to, neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain), comprising
  • the present disclosure provides a method for preemptive or palliative treatment of pain by administering an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • the present disclosure provides a method for treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy 25 with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g.
  • Alzheimer's disease amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease
  • manic depression tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia, comprising administering an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • Parkinson's disease manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia, comprising administering an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • the present disclosure provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a Compound of the Invention and one or more
  • the present disclosure provides a pharmaceutical composition for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium ion channels, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention in a mixture with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • the present disclosure provides a method of modulating sodium channels in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of at least one Compound of the Invention.
  • the present disclosure provides Compounds of the
  • Invention for use in treating pain in a mammal, e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to, neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain.
  • the present disclosure provides Compounds of the
  • Invention for use in treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease), manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia, in a mammal.
  • a neurodegenerative disorder e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • a neurodegenerative disorder e.g. , Alzheimer's disease,
  • the present disclosure provides a radiolabeled Compound of the Invention and the use of such compounds as radioligands in any appropriately selected competitive binding assays and screening methodologies.
  • the present disclosure further provides a method for screening a candidate compound for its ability to bind to a sodium channel or sodium channel subunit using a radiolabeled Compound of the Invention.
  • the compound is radiolabeled with 3 H, "C, or l 4 C. This competitive binding assay can be conducted using any appropriately selected methodology.
  • the screening method comprises: i) introducing a fixed concentration of the radiolabeled compound to an in vitro preparation comprising a soluble or membrane-associated sodium channel, subunit or fragment under conditions that permit the radiolabeled compound to bind to the channel, subunit or fragment, respectively, to form a conjugate; ii) titrating the conjugate with a candidate compound; and iii) determining the ability of the candidate compound to displace the radiolabeled compound from said channel, subunit or fragment.
  • the present disclosure provides a Compound of the
  • the present disclosure provides the use of a Compound of the Invention in the manufacture of a medicament for palliative or preemptive treatment of pain, such as acute pain, chronic pain, or surgical pain.
  • the present disclosure provides a Compound of the
  • Invention for use in the manufacture of a medicament for treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease), manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia, in a mammal.
  • a neurodegenerative disorder e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • a neurodegenerative disorder e.g.
  • One aspect of the present disclosure is based on the use of Compounds of the Invention as blockers of Na + channels.
  • Compounds of the Invention are useful for treating disorders responsive to the blockade of sodium ion 10 channels.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula I:
  • W 1 and W 3 are N and W 2 is CR 3 ; or
  • W 2 and W 3 are N and W 1 is CR 3 ;
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; optionally substituted alkyl; optionally substituted cycloalkyl; aralkyl; (heterocyclo)alkyl;
  • alkoxyalkyl monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; and heteroalkyl;
  • R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl
  • R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino; alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl;
  • R 4 is C 2 -6 dihydroxyalkyl
  • A is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl, e.g. , optionally substituted phenyl and optionally substituted pyridyl;
  • X is selected from the group consisting of -0-; -S-; -SO-; -S0 2 -; -(CR 5a R 5b ) 1 ; -NR 6 -; -S0 2 NR 7 -; and -NR 7 S0 2 -;
  • each R 5a and R 5b which can be identical or different, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; and alkyl;
  • n 0, 1 , 2, or 3;
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl ;
  • a 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl, e.g., optionally substituted phenyl and optionally substituted pyridyl.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula II:
  • R 8a and R 8b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino; alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; carboxy; and alkoxycarbonyl; and ⁇ ' , ⁇ , W 1 , W ⁇ W 3 , R' , R 2 , and R are as defined above in connection with Formula I.
  • R 8A and R 8B are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula III:
  • a 1 , X, R 8a , R 8b , W', W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , R 2 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-III, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • X is selected from the group consisting of -0-; -S-; -S0 2 -; -(C )TM-; and - NH-;
  • n 0 or 1 ;
  • a 1 , R 8a , R 8b , W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , R 2 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula IV:
  • a 1 , R 8a , R 8b , W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , R 2 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is selected from the group consistin
  • R 9a , R 9b , R I Oa , R I Ob , R l l a , R , l b , R l 2 ⁇ and R l 2b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino;
  • alkylamino dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; carboxy; and alkoxycarbonyl; and
  • a 2 , X, R 8a , R 8b , W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , R 2 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • R 9a , R 9b , R , 0a , R 10b , R l l a , R , l b , R l 2a , and R l 2b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • W 1 and W 2 are N and W 3 is CR 3 ;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C alkyl
  • a 1 , A 2 , X, R 8a , R 8b , R 1 , R 2 , and R are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein: W 1 and W 3 are N and W 2 is CR 3 ;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C alkyl; and A 1 , A 2 , X, R 8a , R 8b , R 1 , R 2 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • W 2 and W 3 are N and W 1 is CR 3 ;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C M alkyl; and A 1 , A 2 , X, R 8a , R 8b , R 1 , R 2 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae II-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • R 8a and R 8b are hydrogen
  • a 1 , X, W ⁇ W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , R 2 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; carboxyalkyl; (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl; and (carboxamido)alkyl;
  • R 2 is hydrogen
  • a 1 , A 2 , X, R 8a , R 8b , W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C alkyl
  • R is hydrogen; and A 1 , A 2 , X, R 8a , R 8b , W' , W 2 , W 3 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • R 1 and R 2 are each hydrogen
  • a 1 , A 2 , X, R 8a , R 8 , W' , W 2 , W 3 , and R 4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • R 4 is a C 2- 4 dihydroxyalkyl
  • a 1 , A 2 , X, W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , and R 2 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • a 1 , A 2 , X, W ⁇ W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , and R 2 are as defined above in connection with
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • R 4 is:
  • a , A , X, W ⁇ W, W ⁇ R' , and R z are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • R 4 is:
  • a 1 , A 2 , X, W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , R 1 , and R 2 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula V:
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula VI:
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula VII:
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula VIII:
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is selected from the group consisting of A 1 - 1 and A'-2.
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is selected from the group consisting of A 1 - 1 and A '-2.
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is A '-2.
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is A'-2.
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • a 1 is A'-2;
  • R I Oa and R ,0b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • A' is A'-2;
  • R IOa and R I Ob are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is A 1 -! ,
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is A 1 -! .
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • a 1 is A 1 -! ;
  • R 9a and R 9b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
  • compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
  • a 1 is A 1 - ! ;
  • R 9a and R 9b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
  • Compounds of the Invention are compounds of TABLE 2, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof.
  • alkyl refers to a straight- or branched-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon containing 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , or 12 carbon atoms (i. e. , C ⁇ . ⁇ 2 alkyl) or the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., a C
  • the alkyl group is chosen from a straight chain C M O alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is chosen from a branched chain C j.jo alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a straight chain C
  • . l oalkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, -n-propyl, -n-butyl, -n-pentyl, -n-hexyl, -n- heptyl, -n-octyl, -n-nonyl, and -n-decyl, isopropyl, , sec-butyl, tert-butyl, iso-butyl, .
  • Non-limiting exemplary C I -4 alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, and iso-butyl, 1 -methylhexyl, 2-methylhexyl, 3-methylhexyl, 4- methylhexyl, 5-methylhexyl, 1 ,2-dimethylpentyl, 1 ,3-dimethylpentyl, 1 ,2- dimethylhexyl, 1 ,3-dimethylhexyl, 3,3-dimethylhexyl, 1 ,2-dimethylheptyl, 1 ,3- dimethylheptyl, and 3,3-dimethylheptyl.
  • Non-limiting exemplary C I -4 alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, and iso-butyl,
  • the term "optionally substituted alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group means that the alkyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, or three substituents independently chosen from nitro, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, sulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, and cycloalkyl.
  • the optionally substituted alkyl is substituted with two substituents.
  • the optionally substituted alkyl is substituted with one substituent.
  • Non-limiting exemplary optionally substituted alkyl groups include -CH 2 CH 2 N0 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 C0 2 H, -CH 2 CH 2 S02CH 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 COPh, and -CH 2 C 6 H, , .
  • cycloalkyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers to saturated and partially unsaturated
  • cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbons containing one, two or three rings having from 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , or 12 carbon atoms (i. e. , C3- I 2 cycloalkyl) or the number of carbons designated.
  • the cycloalkyl group has two rings.
  • the cycloalkyl group has one ring.
  • the cycloalkyl group is chosen from a C3-8 cycloalkyl group.
  • the cycloalkyl group is chosen from a C3.6 cycloalkyl group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyi, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl,
  • cycloundecyl cyclododecyl, norbornyl, decalin, adamantyl, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptenyl, cycloheptadienyl, cycloheptatrienyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclooctadienyl, cyclooctatrienyl, cyclooctatetraenyl, cyclononenyl, cyclononadienyl,
  • cycloalkyl as used by itself or as part of another group means that the cycloalkyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, or three
  • substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido,
  • alkylcarbonyl arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsuifonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl,
  • the optionally substituted cycloalkyl is substituted with two substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted cycloalkyl is substituted with one substituent.
  • alkenyl refers to an alkyl group having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms (C 2 -ioalkenyl) and including at least one, e.g. one, two or three, carbon- carbon double
  • the alkenyl group is chosen from a C 2 . 6 alkenyl group.
  • the alkenyl group is chosen from a C 2 .4 alkenyl group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, isopropenyl, butenyl, sec-butenyl, - so-butylenyl, - 1 -pentenyl, -2-pentenyl, -3- methyl-l -butenyl, -2-methyl-2-butenyl, -2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, - 1 -hexenyl, -2-hexenyl, -3-hexenyl, - 1 -heptenyl, -2-heptenyl, -3-heptenyl, -1 -octenyl, -2-octenyl, -3-octenyl, - 1 -nonenyl, -2-nonenyl, -3-nonenyl, - 1 -decenyl, -2-decenyl, -3-decenyl
  • alkenyl as used herein by itself or as part of another group means the alkenyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two or three
  • substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido,
  • alkylcarbonyl arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclo.
  • alkynyl refers to an alkyl group having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms ((C 2 .io)alkynyl) and including at least one, e.g. one, two or three, carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • the alkynyl has one carbon-to- carbon triple bond.
  • the alkynyl group is chosen from a C 2 . 6 alkynyl group.
  • the alkynyl group is chosen from a C 2 - 4 alkynyl group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, 1 - butynyl, 2-butynyl, 1 -pentynyl, 2-pentynyl, -3-methyl- l -butynyl, -4-pentynyl, - 1 - hexynyl, -2-hexynyl, -5-hexynyl, - 1 -heptynyl, -2-heptynyl, -6-heptynyl, -1 -octynyl, - 2-octynyl, -7-octynyl, - 1 -nonynyl, -2-nonynyl, -8-nonynyl, - 1 -decynyl, -2-decynyl, - 9-decynyl, and the like.
  • alkynyl as used herein by itself or as part of another group means the alkynyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two or three
  • substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido,
  • alkylcarbonyl arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclo.
  • haloalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted by one or more fluorine, chlorine, bromine and/or iodine atoms.
  • the alkyl group is substituted by one, two, or three fluorine and/or chlorine atoms.
  • the haloalkyl group is chosen from a C
  • Non- limiting exemplary haloalkyl groups include fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromefhyl, pentafluoroethyl, 1 , 1 -difluoroethyl, 2,2-difluoroethyl, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, 3,3,3-trifluoropropyl, 4,4,4-trifluorobutyl, and trichloromethyl groups.
  • the term "monohydroxyalkyl” as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group as defined above substituted with exactly one hydroxy group.
  • monohydroxyalkyl groups include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and hydroxybutyl groups. In one embodiment, the monohydroxyalkyl group is a C
  • dihydroxyalkyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group as defined above substituted with exactly two hydroxy groups.
  • dihydroxyalkyl groups include 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl and l ,3-dihydroxyprop-2-yl. In one embodiment, the dihydroxyalkyl group is a C2-6 dihydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, the dihydroxyalkyl group is a C2-4 dihydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, the dihydroxyalkyl group is a C 2 dihydroxyalkyl.
  • alkoxy refers to an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or optionally substituted alkynyl attached to a terminal oxygen atom.
  • the alkoxy group is chosen from a Ci -6 alkoxy group.
  • the alkoxy group is chosen from a C 1.4 alkyl attached to a terminal oxygen atom, e.g. , methoxy, ethoxy, and /eri-butoxy.
  • alkylthio refers to a sulfur atom substituted by an optionally substituted alkyl group.
  • the alkylthio group is chosen from a C ]. 4 alkylthio group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary alkylthio groups include -SCH3, and -SCH 2 CH 3 .
  • alkoxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary alkoxyalkyl groups include methoxymethyl, methoxyethyl, methoxypropyl, methoxybutyl, ethoxymethyl, ethoxyethyl, ethoxypropyl, ethoxybutyl, propoxymethyl, iso-propoxymethyl, propoxyethyl, propoxypropyl, butoxymethyl, tert-butoxymethyl, isobutoxymethyl, sec- butoxymethyl, and pentyloxymethyl.
  • heteroalkyl as used by itself or part of another group refers to a stable straight or branched chain
  • the heteroatoms can be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at a position at which the heteroalkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule. In one embodiment, the heteroalkyl group contains two oxygen atoms.
  • Non-limiting exemplary heteroalkyl groups include -CH 2 OCH- 2 CH 2 OCH 3 , -OCH2CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH3, -CH 2 NHCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 , -OCH 2 CH 2 NH 2 , and -NHCH 2 CH 2 N(H)CH 3 .
  • haloalkoxy as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a haloalkyl attached to a terminal oxygen atom.
  • Non-limiting exemplary haloalkoxy groups include fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, trichloromethoxy, and 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy.
  • aryl refers to a monocyclic or bicyclic aromatic ring system having from six to fourteen carbon atoms (i. e. , C6- i4 aryl).
  • Non-limiting exemplary aryl groups include phenyl (abbreviated as "Ph"), naphthyl, phenanthryl, anthracyl, indenyl, azulenyl, biphenyl, biphenylenyl, and fluorenyl groups.
  • the aryl group is chosen from phenyl or naphthyl.
  • the term "optionally substituted aryl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group means that the aryl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl,
  • arylcarbonyl alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl, (dialkylamino)alkyl,
  • the optionally substituted aryl is an optionally substituted phenyl. In one embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has four substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has three substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has two substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has one substituent.
  • Non-limiting exemplary substituted aryl groups include 2-methylphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 2-cyanophenyl,
  • aryloxy as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an optionally substituted aryl attached to a terminal oxygen atom.
  • a non-limiting exemplary aryloxy group is PhO-.
  • aralkyloxy as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an aralkyl group attached to a terminal oxygen atom.
  • a non-limiting exemplary aralkyloxy group is PhCH ⁇ O-.
  • heteroaryl or
  • heteroaryl refers to monocyclic and bicyclic aromatic ring systems having 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , 12, 13, or 14 ring atoms (i.e. , C5- 14 heteroaryl) and 1 , 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms independently chosen from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.
  • the heteroaryl has three heteroatoms.
  • the heteroaryl has two heteroatoms.
  • the heteroaryl has one heteroatom.
  • the heteroaryl is a C 5 heteroaryl.
  • the heteroaryl is a C 6 heteroaryl.
  • Non-limiting exemplary heteroaryl groups include thienyl, benzo[b]thienyl, naphtho[2,3-b]thienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, benzofuryl, pyranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzooxazonyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, 2H- pyrrolyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl,
  • the heteroaryl is chosen from thienyl (e.g.
  • pyrrolyl e.g. , l H-pyrrol-2-yl and l H-pyrrol-3-yl
  • imidazolyl e.g. , 2H-imidazol-2-yl and 2H-imidazol-4-yl
  • pyrazolyl e.g. , l H-pyrazol-3-yl, l H-pyrazol-4-yl, and l H-pyrazol-5-yl
  • pyridyl e.g.
  • pyridin-2-yl pyridin-3-yl, and pyridin-4-yl
  • pyrimidinyl e.g. , pyrimidin-2-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl, pyrimidin-5-yl, and pyrimidin-5-yl
  • thiazolyl e.g. , thiazol-2-yl, thiazol-4-yl, and thiazol-5-yl
  • isothiazolyl e.g. , isothiazol-3-yl, isothiazol-4-yl, and isothiazol-5-yl
  • oxazolyl e.g.
  • isoxazolyl e.g. , isoxazol-3-yl, isoxazol-4-yl, and isoxazol-5-yl.
  • heteroaryl is also meant to include possible N-oxides.
  • Non-limiting exemplary N- oxides include pyridyl N-oxide.
  • the term "optionally substituted heteroaryl" as used by itself or as part of another group means that the heteroaryl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents, e.g.
  • substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido, aikylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl,
  • the optionally substituted heteroaryl has one substituent.
  • the optionally substituted is an optionally substituted pyridyl, i. e., 2-, 3-, or 4-pyridyl. Any available carbon or nitrogen atom can be substituted.
  • the optionally substituted heteroaryl is an optionally substituted indole.
  • heterocyclo refers to saturated and partially unsaturated (e.g., containing one or two double bonds) cyclic groups containing 1 , 2, or 3 rings having from 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , 12, 13, or 14 carbon atoms (i.e., C 2 - i 4 heterocyclo) and one or two oxygen, sulfur and/or nitrogen atoms.
  • heterocyclo is meant to include cyclic ureido groups such as 2-imidazolidinone and cyclic amide groups such as ⁇ -lactam, ⁇ -lactam, ⁇ -lactam and ⁇ -lactam.
  • heterocyclo is also meant to include groups having fused optionally substituted aryl groups, e.g. , indolinyl.
  • the heterocyclo group is chosen from a 5- or 6- membered cyclic group containing one ring and one or two oxygen and/or nitrogen atoms.
  • the heterocyclo can be optionally linked to the rest of the molecule through a carbon or nitrogen atom.
  • the "heterocyclo” is a 3- to 8- membered heterocyclo.
  • Non-limiting exemplary heterocyclo, i.e. 3- to 8-membered heterocyclo, groups include 2-imidazolidinone, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, and indolinyl.
  • the term "optionally substituted heterocyclo" as used herein by itself or part of another group means the heterocyclo as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one to four substituents independently selected from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamide, alkylcarbonyl,
  • arylcarbonyl alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl, (dialkylamino)alkyl,
  • heterocycio groups include:
  • amino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NH 2 .
  • alkylamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NHR 13 , wherein R 13 is alkyl.
  • dialkylamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NR 1 a R 1 b , wherein R 14a and R l 4b are each independently alkyl or R l 4a and R , 4b are taken together to form a 3- to 8-membered optionally substituted heterocycio.
  • hydroxyalkylamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NHR 1 5 , wherein R 1 5 is monohydroxyalkyl or dihydroxyalkyl.
  • arylamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NR l 6a R 16b , wherein R l 6a is optionally substituted aryl and R l 6b is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • cycloalkylamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NR l 7a R l 7b , wherein R l 7a is optionally substituted cycloalkyl and R l 7b is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • heteroarylamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NR 18a R l 8b wherein R l 8a is optionally substituted heteroaryl and R l 8b is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • heterocycloamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NR l 9a R 19b wherein R 19a is optionally substituted heterocyclo and R 19b is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • aminoalkyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with an amino group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary amino alkyl groups include -CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 ,
  • diaminoalkyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers an alkyl group substituted with two amino groups.
  • a non-limiting exemplary diaminoalkyl includes
  • (alkylamino)alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkylamino group.
  • a non-limiting exemplary (alkylamino)alkyl group is
  • dialkylamino)alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted by a dialkylamino group.
  • a non-limiting exemplary (dialkylamino)alkyl group is -CH 2 CH 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 .
  • (cyano)alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more cyano, e.g., -CN, groups.
  • Non-limiting exemplary (cyano)alkyl groups include -CH 2 CH 2 CN, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CN, and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CN.
  • Non-limiting exemplary carboxamido groups include -CONH 2 , -CON(H)CH 3 , CON(CH 3 ) 2 , and CON(H)Ph.
  • (carboxamido)alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a carboxamido group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary (carboxamido)alkyl groups include -CH 2 CONH 2 , -C(H)CH 3 -CONH 2 , and -CH 2 CON(H)CH 3 .
  • the term "sulfonamido" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -S0 2 NR 2 l a R 2 l b , wherein R 2 l a and R 2l b are each independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl, or R 2 l a and R 21b taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached from a 3- to 8-membered heterocyclo group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary sulfonamido groups include -S0 2 NH 2 , -S0 2 N(H)CH 3 , and - S0 2 N(H)Ph.
  • a non-limiting exemplary alkylcarbonyl group is -COCH 3 .
  • a non-limiting exemplary arylcarbonyl group is -COPh.
  • alkylsulfonyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a sulfonyl group, i. e. , -S0 2 -, substituted by any of the above-mentioned optionally substituted alkyl groups.
  • a non-limiting exemplary alkylsulfonyl group is -S0 2 CH 3 .
  • arylsulfonyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a sulfonyl group, i.e. , -SO2-, substituted by any of the above-mentioned optionally substituted aryl groups.
  • a non-limiting exemplary arylsulfonyl group is -S0 2 Ph.
  • mercaptoalkyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers to any of the above-mentioned alkyl groups substituted by a -SH group.
  • carboxy as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -COOH.
  • halo or halogen as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -F, -CI, Br, or -I.
  • nitro as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -N0 2 .
  • cyano as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -CN.
  • hydroxy as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -OH.
  • carboxyalkyl as used by itself or as part of another group refers to any of the above-mentioned alkyl groups substituted with a -COOH.
  • Non-limiting exemplary carboxyalkyl groups include -CH2CO 2 H and -CH(CH 3 )-C0 2 H.
  • Non-limiting exemplary alkoxycarbonyl groups are -C0 2 Me and -C0 2 Et.
  • (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl groups include -CH 2 C0 2 CH 3 and -C(H)CH 3 -C0 2 CH 3 .
  • the term “aralkyl” as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with one, two, or three optionally substituted aryl groups. In one embodiment, the aralkyl group is a C 1 .4 alkyl substituted with one optionally substituted aryl group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary aralkyl groups include benzyl, phenethyl, -CHPh 2 , and -CH(4-F-Ph) 2 .
  • the term "azido" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -N 3 .
  • the term "(heterocyclo)alkyl” as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with one, two, or three optionally substituted heterocyclo groups.
  • the (heterocyclo)alkyl is a C 1 .4 alkyl substituted with one optionally substituted heterocyclo group.
  • Non-limiting exemplary (heterocyclo)alkyl groups include:
  • the term "(heteroaryl)alkyl” as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with one, two, or three optionally substituted heteroaryl groups.
  • the (heteroaryl)alkyl group is a C
  • alkylcarbonylamino as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkylcarbonyl group attached to an amino.
  • a non-limiting exemplary alkylcarbonylamino group is -NHCOCH 3 .
  • alkylcarbonyloxy refers to oxygen substituted by one of the above-mentioned alkylcarbonyl groups.
  • a non-limiting exemplary alkylcarbonyloxy group is -OCOCH 3 .
  • prodrugs of any of the disclosed compounds.
  • prodrugs are considered to be any covalently bonded carriers that release the active parent drug in vivo.
  • prodrugs will be functional derivatives of Compounds of the Invention which will be readily convertible in vivo, e.g., by being metabolized, into the required Compound of the Invention.
  • Conventional procedures for the selection and preparation of suitable prodrug derivatives are described in, for example, Design of Prodrugs, H. Bundgaard ed., Elsevier ( 1985); "Drug and Enzyme Targeting, Part A," K. Widder et al. eds., Vol.
  • Non-limiting examples of prodrugs include esters or amides of Compounds of the Invention having hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl as a substituent, and these can be prepared by reacting such parent compounds with anhydrides such as succinic anhydride.
  • the present disclosure encompasses any of the Compounds of the Invention being isotopically-labelled ⁇ i.e. , radiolabeled) by having one or more atoms replaced by an atom having a different atomic mass or mass number.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into the disclosed compounds include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 1 'C, l 3 C, l4 C, l 5 N, , 8 0, l 7 0, 3 , P, 32 P, 35 S, l 8 F, and 36 C1, respectively, e.g. , 3 H, "C, and , 4 C.
  • Isotopically-labeled Compounds of the Invention can be prepared by methods known in the art.
  • the present disclosure encompasses 3 H, "C, or l4 C radiolabeled Compounds of the Invention and the use of any such compounds as radioligands for their ability to bind to the sodium channel.
  • one use of the labeled compounds of the present disclosure is the characterization of specific receptor binding.
  • Another use of a labeled Compound of the Invention is an alternative to animal testing for the evaluation of structure-activity relationships.
  • the receptor assay can be performed at a fixed concentration of a labeled Compound of the Invention and at increasing concentrations of a test compound in a competition assay.
  • a tritiated Compound of the Invention can be prepared by introducing tritium into the particular compound, for example, by catalytic dehalogenation with tritium.
  • This method may include reacting a suitably halogen-substituted precursor of the compound with tritium gas in the presence of a suitable catalyst, for example, Pd/C, in the presence or absence of a base.
  • a suitable catalyst for example, Pd/C
  • Other suitable methods for preparing tritiated compounds can be found in Filer, Isotopes in the Physical and Biomedical Sciences, Vol. 1 , Labeled Compounds (Part A), Chapter 6 (1987).
  • C-labeled compounds can be prepared by employing starting materials having a I4 C carbon.
  • Some of the Compounds of the Invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and may thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms.
  • the present disclosure is meant to encompass the use of all such possible forms, as well as their racemic and resolved forms and mixtures thereof.
  • the individual enantiomers can be separated according to methods known in the art in view of the present disclosure.
  • the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that they include both E and Z geometric isomers. All tautomers are intended to be encompassed by the present disclosure as well.
  • stereoisomers is a general term for all isomers of individual molecules that differ only in the orientation of their atoms in space. It includes enantiomers and isomers of compounds with more than one chiral center that are not mirror images of one another (diastereomers).
  • chiral center refers to a carbon atom to which four different groups are attached.
  • enantiomer and “enantiomeric”Tefer to a molecule that cannot be superimposed on its mirror image and hence is optically active wherein the enantiomer rotates the plane of polarized light in one direction and its mirror image compound rotates the plane of polarized light in the opposite direction.
  • racemic refers to a mixture of equal parts of enantiomers and which mixture is optically inactive.
  • resolution refers to the separation or concentration or depletion of one of the two enantiomeric forms of a molecule.
  • the present disclosure encompasses the preparation and use of salts of the Compounds of the Invention, including non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts include inorganic and organic acid addition salts and basic salts.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, metal salts such as sodium salt, potassium salt, cesium salt and the like; alkaline earth metals such as calcium salt, magnesium salt and the like; organic amine salts such as triethylamine salt, pyridine salt, picoline salt, ethanolamine salt, triethanolamine salt, dicyclohexylamine salt, ⁇ , ⁇ '- dibenzylethylenediamine salt and the like; inorganic acid salts such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, phosphate, sulphate and the like; organic acid salts such as citrate, lactate, tartrate, maleate, fumarate, mandelate, acetate, dichloroacetate,
  • sulfonates such as methanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate and the like
  • amino acid salts such as arginate, asparginate, glutamate and the like.
  • Acid addition salts can be formed by mixing a solution of the particular Compound of the Invention with a solution of a pharmaceutically acceptable nontoxic acid such as hydrochloric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, acetic acid, citric acid, tartaric acid, carbonic acid, phosphoric acid, oxalic acid,
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable nontoxic acid such as hydrochloric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, acetic acid, citric acid, tartaric acid, carbonic acid, phosphoric acid, oxalic acid
  • Basic salts can be formed by mixing a solution of the compound of the present disclosure with a solution of a pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, choline hydroxide, sodium carbonate and the like.
  • the present disclosure encompasses the preparation and use of solvates of
  • Solvates typically do not significantly alter the physiological activity or toxicity of the compounds, and as such may function as pharmacological equivalents.
  • the term "solvate” as used herein is a combination, physical association and/or solvation of a compound of the present disclosure with a solvent molecule such as, e.g. a disolvate, monosolvate or hemisolvate, where the ratio of solvent molecule to compound of the present disclosure is 2: 1 , 1 : 1 or 1 :2, respectively.
  • This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding.
  • the solvate can be isolated, such as when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated into the crystal lattice of a crystalline solid.
  • solvate encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates.
  • Compounds of the Invention can be present as solvated forms with a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent, such as water, methanol, ethanol, and the like, and it is intended that the disclosure includes both solvated and unsolvated forms of Compounds of the Invention.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent such as water, methanol, ethanol, and the like
  • solvate is a hydrate.
  • a "hydrate” relates to a particular subgroup of solvates where the solvent molecule is water.
  • Solvates typically can function as pharmacological equivalents. Preparation of solvates is known in the art. See, for example, M. Caira et al, J. Pharmaceut.
  • a typical, non-limiting, process of preparing a solvate would involve dissolving a Compound of the Invention in a desired solvent (organic, water, or a mixture thereof) at temperatures above 20°C to about 25°C, then cooling the solution at a rate sufficient to form crystals, and isolating the crystals by known methods, e.g. , filtration.
  • Analytical techniques such as infrared spectroscopy can be used to confirm the presence of the solvent in a crystal of the solvate.
  • Compounds of the Invention are blockers of sodium (Na + ) channels, a number of diseases and conditions mediated by sodium ion influx can be treated by employing these compounds.
  • the present disclosure is thus directed generally to a method for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels in an animal suffering from, or at risk of suffering from, said disorder, said method comprising administering to the animal an effective amount of one or more
  • the present disclosure is further directed to a method of modulating sodium channels in an animal in need thereof, said method comprising administering to the animal a modulating-effective amount of at least one Compound of the Invention.
  • the present disclosure provides a method of treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, pain (e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain), a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease), migraine, manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia.
  • the disclosure provides a method of treating pain.
  • the type of pain is chronic pain.
  • the type of pain is neuropathic pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is postoperative pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is inflammatory pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is surgical pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is acute pain. In another embodiment, the treatment of pain (e.g. , chronic pain, such as neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, or inflammatory pain, acute pain or surgical pain) is preemptive. In another embodiment, the treatment of pain is palliative. In each instance, such method of treatment requires administering to an animal in need of such treatment an amount of a Compound of the Invention that is therapeutically effective in achieving said treatment. In one embodiment, the amount of such compound is the amount that is effective to block sodium channels in vitro. In one embodiment, the amount of such compound is the amount that is effective to block sodium channels in vivo.
  • Chronic pain includes, but is not limited to, inflammatory pain, postoperative pain, cancer pain, osteoarthritis pain associated with metastatic cancer, trigeminal neuralgia, acute herpetic and postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, causalgia, brachial plexus avulsion, occipital neuralgia, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, fibromyalgia, gout, phantom limb pain, burn pain, and other forms of neuralgia, neuropathic, and idiopathic pain syndromes.
  • Chronic somatic pain generally results from inflammatory responses to tissue injury such as nerve entrapment, surgical procedures, cancer or arthritis (Brower, Nature Biotechnology 75:387-391 (2000)).
  • the inflammatory process is a complex series of biochemical and cellular events activated in response to tissue injury or the presence of foreign substances (Levine, Inflammatory Pain, In: Textbook of Pain, Wall and Melzack eds., 3 rd ed., 1994). Inflammation often occurs at the site of injured tissue, or foreign material, and contributes to the process of tissue repair and healing.
  • the cardinal signs of inflammation include erythema (redness), heat, edema (swelling), pain and loss of function (ibid.).
  • the majority of patients with inflammatory pain do not experience pain continually, but rather experience enhanced pain when the inflamed site is moved or touched. Inflammatory pain includes, but is not limited to, that associated with osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis.
  • Chronic neuropathic pain is a heterogeneous disease state with an unclear etiology.
  • the pain can be mediated by multiple mechanisms. This type of pain generally arises from injury to the peripheral or central nervous tissue.
  • the syndromes include pain associated with spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis, post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia, phantom pain, causalgia, and reflex sympathetic dystrophy and lower back pain.
  • Chronic pain is different from acute pain in that patients suffer the abnormal pain sensations that can be described as spontaneous pain, continuous superficial burning and/or deep aching pain.
  • the pain can be evoked by heat-, cold-, and mechano-hyperalgesia or by heat-, cold-, or mechano-allodynia.
  • Neuropathic pain can be caused by injury or infection of peripheral sensory nerves. It includes, but is not limited to, pain from peripheral nerve trauma, herpes virus infection, diabetes mellitus, causalgia, plexus avulsion, neuroma, limb amputation, and vasculitis. Neuropathic pain is also caused by nerve damage from chronic alcoholism, human immunodeficiency virus infection, hypothyroidism, uremia, or vitamin deficiencies. Stroke (spinal or brain) and spinal cord injury can also induce neuropathic pain. Cancer-related neuropathic pain results from tumor growth compression of adjacent nerves, brain, or spinal cord. In addition, cancer treatments, including chemotherapy and radiation therapy, can also cause nerve injury. Neuropathic pain includes but is not limited to pain caused by nerve injury such as, for example, the pain from which diabetics suffer.
  • the present disclosure is also directed to the use of a Compound of the Invention in the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels (e.g. , any of the disorders listed above) in an animal suffering from said disorder.
  • a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels e.g. , any of the disorders listed above
  • dichloropyrimide A is made to react with dioxaborolane B to give compound C.
  • the carboxylic acid group of compound C is esterified to give compound D
  • compound D is made to react with dioxaborolane E to give compound F.
  • the alkenyl group of compound F is dihydroxylated, for example using AD-Mix-a or AD-Mix- ⁇ , to give compound G (or the R- or S-isomer thereof).
  • Compound G is made to react with amine H R ' R 2 using standard coupling methods and reagents to give a compound having Formula I wherein R 4 is 1 ,2- dihydroxyethyl.
  • R 4 is 1 ,2- dihydroxyethyl.
  • Compounds of the Invention were assessed by sodium mobilization and/or electrophysiological assays for sodium channel blocker activity.
  • One aspect of the present disclosure is based on the use of the Compounds of the Invention as sodium channel blockers. Based upon this property, Compounds of the Invention are considered useful in treating a condition or disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium ion channels, e.g., stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or
  • a neurodegenerative disorder e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic
  • Parkinson's disease manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia.
  • Compounds of the Invention are also expected to be effective in treating pain, e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to, neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain.
  • the present disclosure is directed to Compounds of the Invention that are blockers of sodium channels.
  • those compounds having useful sodium channel blocking properties exhibit an IC50 for Nav l . l , Na v 1.2, Na v 1.3, Na v 1.4, Na v 1.5, Na v 1.6, Na v 1.7, Na v 1.8, and/or Na v 1.9 of about 100 ⁇ or less, e.g. , about 50 ⁇ or less, about 25 ⁇ or less, about 10 ⁇ or less, about 5 ⁇ or less, or about 1 ⁇ or less, in sodium mobilization and/or electrophysiological assays.
  • Compounds of the Invention exhibit an IC 50 for Na v 1.7 of 100 ⁇ or less, about 50 ⁇ or less, about 25 ⁇ or less, about 10 ⁇ or less, about 5 ⁇ or less, about 1 ⁇ or less, about 0.5 ⁇ or less, about 0.1 ⁇ or less, about 0.05 ⁇ or less, or about 0.01 ⁇ or less.
  • Compounds of the Invention can be tested for their Na + channel blocking activity using methods known in the art and by the following fluorescence imaging and electrophysiological in vitro assays and/or in vivo assays.
  • Compounds of the Invention demonstrate substantially no penetration across the CNS blood-brain barrier in a mammal. Such compounds are referred to as "peripherally restricted” as a means to designate their PNS versus CNS tissue selectivity.
  • the PNS:CNS concentration ratio of a peripherally restricted Compound of the Invention is about 5: 1 , about 10: 1 , about 20: 1 , about 30: 1 ; about 50: 1 ; about 100: 1 , about 250: 1 , about 500: 1 , about 1000: 1 , about 5,000: 1 , about 10,000: 1 , or more.
  • Compounds of the Invention can be tested for their ability to penetrate the central nervous system using in vitro and in vivo methods known in the art.
  • Recombinant Na v 1.7 Cell Line In vitro assays were performed in a recombinant cell line expressing cDNA encoding the alpha subunit (Na v l .7, SCN9a, PN 1 , NE) of human Na v 1.7 (Accession No. NM_002977). The cell line was provided by investigators at Yale University (Cummins et al, J. Neurosci. 18(23): 9607-961 ( 1998)). For dominant selection of the Na v 1 .7-expressing clones, the expression plasmid co-expressed the neomycin resistance gene.
  • the cell line was constructed in the human embryonic kidney cell line, HEK293, under the influence of the CMV major late promoter, and stable clones were selected using limiting dilution cloning and antibiotic selection using the neomycin analogue, G41 8.
  • Additional cell lines expressing recombinant Na v 1 .7 cloned from other species can also be used, alone or in combination with various beta subunits, gamma subunits or chaperones.
  • Non-recombinant Cell Lines Expressing Native Na v l .7 can be performed in a cell line expressing native, non-recombinant Na v l .7, such as the ND7 mouse neuroblastoma X rat dorsal root ganglion (DRG) hybrid cell line ND7/23, available from the European Cell Culture Collection (Cat. No. 92090903, Salisbury, Wiltshire, United Kingdom).
  • the assays can also be performed in other cell lines expressing native, non-recombinant Na v 1.7, from various species, or in cultures of fresh or preserved sensory neurons, such as dorsal root ganglion (DRG) cells, isolated from various species.
  • DRG dorsal root ganglion
  • Primary screens or counter-screens of other voltage-gated sodium channels can also be performed, and the cell lines can be constructed using methods known in the art, purchased from collaborators or commercial establishments, and they can express either recombinant or native channels.
  • the primary counter-screen is for one of the central neuronal sodium channels, Navl .2 (rBIIa), expressed in HEK293 host cells (Ilyin et al., Br. J. Pharmacol. 144:801 -812 (2005)). Pharmacological profiling for these counter- screens is carried out under conditions similar to the primary or alternative Na v l .7 assays described below.
  • cell culture reagents were purchased from Mediatech of Herndon, VA.
  • the recombinant Na v 1.7/HEK293 cells were routinely cultured in growth medium consisting of Dulbecco's minimum essential medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS, Hyclone, Thermo Fisher Scientific, Logan, UT), 100 U/mL penicillin, 100 g/mL streptomycin, 2-4 n M L- glutamine, and 500 mg/mL G418.
  • FBS fetal bovine serum
  • penicillin 100 g/mL
  • streptomycin 2-4 n M L- glutamine
  • 500 mg/mL G418 500 mg/mL G418.
  • the selective antibiotic was omitted, and additional media formulations can be applied as needed.
  • the assay buffer was formulated by removing 120 mL from a 1 L bottle of fresh, sterile dH 2 0 (Mediatech, Herndon, VA) and adding 100 mL of 10X HBSS that does not contain Ca ++ or Mg ++ (Gibco, Invitrogen, Grand Island, NY) followed by 20 mL of 1.0 M Hepes, pH 7.3 (Fisher Scientific, BP299- 100).
  • the final buffer consisted of 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3, 1.261 mM CaCl 2 , 0.493 mM MgCl 2 , 0.407 mM Mg(SO) 4 , 5.33 mM KC1, 0.441 mM KH 2 P0 4 , 137 mM NaCl, 0.336 mM Na 2 HP0 4 and 0.556 mM D-glucose (Hanks et al., Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 71 : 196 (1949)), and the simple formulation was typically the basic buffer throughout the assay (i.e., all wash and addition steps).
  • CoroNa Green AM Na Dye for Primary Fluorescence Assay The fluorescence indicator used in the primary fluorescence assay was the cell permeant version of CoroNaTM Green (Invitrogen, Molecular Probes, Eugene, OR), a dye that emits light in the fluorescence range (Harootunian et al., J. Biol. Chem.
  • fluorescence indicator that can be used in alternative fluorescence assays is the blue version membrane potential dye (MDS, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA), a dye that detects changes in molecules following a change in membrane potential. An increase in fluorescence is expected if agonist stimulation provokes a change in membrane potential.
  • Cells expressing Na v l .7 or other sodium channels are incubated with the membrane potential dye 30-60 minutes before the fluorescence assay.
  • the dye is washed out immediately before the assay, and the dye is then replaced. In the version lacking KC1 pre-stimulation, the dye remains on the cells and is not washed out or replaced. The dye is stored in the dark as a lyophilized powder, and then an aliquot dissolved in assay buffer to form a 20X-concentrated stock solution that can be used for several weeks.
  • veratridine is an alkaloid small molecule that facilitates the capture of channel openings by inhibiting inactivation
  • scorpion venom is a natural preparation that includes peptide toxins selective for different subsets of voltage-gated sodium channels. These scorpion toxins inhibit the fast inactivation of their cognate target channels.
  • Test compounds were dissolved in DMSO to yield 10 mM stock solutions.
  • the stock solutions were further diluted using DMSO in 1 :3 serial dilution steps with 10 points (10,000 ⁇ , 3.333 ⁇ , 1.1 1 1 ⁇ , 370 ⁇ , 123 ⁇ , 41 ⁇ , 14 ⁇ , 4.6 ⁇ , 1.5 ⁇ and 0.5 ⁇ ).
  • the stock solutions were further diluted in assay buffer ( 1 : 125) as 4X stock serial dilutions with a DMSO
  • FLIPR® or FLIPR TETRA ® sodium dye assay with KCl and test article preincubation Cells were prepared by plating the recombinant HEK293 cells or other host cells expressing either recombinant or non-recombinant, native, Nay l .7 alpha subunit, alone or in combination with various beta and gamma subunits at a density of -40,000 cells/well into a 96-well black, clear-bottom, PDL-coated plate.
  • the assay can be adapted to 384-well or 1 ,536-well format, if desired, using
  • the plate was then incubated in growth media, with or without selective antibiotic, overnight at 37°C at 5% CO2, 95% humidity, in preparation for the assay.
  • growth media with or without selective antibiotic, overnight at 37°C at 5% CO2, 95% humidity, in preparation for the assay.
  • the procedure was very similar, though optimal densities of cells, media and subsequent assay components can be fine-tuned for the particular cell line or isoform.
  • the media was flicked from the cells and the wells were washed once with 50 ⁇ /well assay buffer ( I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3) and then pre-incubated with the test articles, CoroNaTM Green AM sodium dye (for cell loading) and KCl for re-polarization and synchronization of the channels in the entire population of cells.
  • 50 ⁇ /well assay buffer I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3
  • CoroNaTM Green AM sodium dye for cell loading
  • KCl for re-polarization and synchronization of the channels in the entire population of cells.
  • the components were added as follows, immediately after the wash step: 1 ) first, the compound dilutions and controls were added as 4X concentrates in assay buffer at 50 ⁇ iL/well; 2) CoroNaTM Green AM dye was diluted from the stock solution to 20 ⁇ in assay buffer (4X concentrate) and added to the plate at 50 nL/well; and 3) finally, a solution of 180 mM KCl (2X) was prepared by diluting a 2M stock solution into assay buffer and the solution was added to the cells at 100 ⁇ /well. The cells were incubated at 25°C in the dark for 30 min. before their fluorescence was measured.
  • the plates containing dye-loaded cells were then flicked to remove the preincubation components and washed once with 100 ⁇ ⁇ assay buffer. A 100 ⁇ aliquot of assay buffer was added back to the plate, and the real-time assay was commenced.
  • the assay was performed as a screening assay as well with the test articles present in standard amounts (e.g., 10 ⁇ ) in only one or two wells of a multi-well plate during the primary screen. Hits in this screen were typically profiled more exhaustively (multiple times), subjected to dose-response or competition assays and tested in counter screens against other voltage-gate sodium channels or other biologically relevant target molecules.
  • FLIPR® or FLIPR TETRA ® membrane potential assay with KC1 and test article pre-incubation Cells are prepared by plating the recombinant HEK293 cells or other host cells expressing either recombinant or non-recombinant, native, Nav l .7 alpha subunit, alone or in combination with various beta and gamma subunits at a density of -40,000 cells/well into a 96-well black, clear-bottom, PDL-coated plate.
  • the assay can be adapted to 384-well or 1 ,536-well format, if desired, using
  • the assay protocol is similar, though optimal densities of cells, media and subsequent assay components can be fine-tuned for the particular cell line or sodium channel isoform being tested.
  • the media is flicked from the cells and the wells are washed once with 50 ⁇ assay buffer ( I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3) and then pre-incubated with the test articles, the membrane potential dye (for cell loading), and the KC1 for re-polarization and synchronization of the channels in the entire population of cells.
  • 50 ⁇ assay buffer I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3
  • the components are added as follows, immediately after the wash step: 1 ) first, the compound dilutions and controls are added as 4X concentrates in assay buffer at 50 ⁇ ; 2) membrane potential dye is diluted from the stock solution in assay buffer (4X concentrate) and added to the plate at 50 ⁇ , ⁇ ; and 3) finally, a solution of 1 80 mM KG (2X) is prepared by diluting a 2M stock solution into assay buffer and the solution added to the cells at 100 ⁇ ⁇ . The cells are incubated at 37°C in the dark for 30-60 min. before their fluorescence is measured.
  • the plates containing dye-loaded cells are then flicked to remove the preincubation components and washed once with 50 ⁇ assay buffer. A 50 ⁇ , ⁇ aliquot of membrane potential dye is added back to the plate, and the realtime assay is commenced. The fluorescence of cells is measured using a
  • RNU relative fluorescence units
  • results are expressed in relative fluorescence units (RFU) and can be determined by using the maximum signal during the latter part of the stimulation; or the maximum minus the minimum during the whole stimulation period; or by taking the area under the curve for the whole stimulation period.
  • REU relative fluorescence units
  • the assay can be performed as a screening assay as well with the test articles present in standard amounts (e.g., 10 ⁇ ) in only one or two wells of a multi-well plate during the primary screen. Hits in this screen are typically profiled more exhaustively (multiple times), subjected to dose-response or competition assays and tested in counter screens against other voltage-gate sodium channels or other biologically relevant target molecules.
  • FLIPR® or FLIPR TETRA ® sodium dye assay without KC1 and test article preincubation Cells are prepared by plating the recombinant HEK293 cells or other host cells expressing either recombinant or non-recombinant, native, Nay l .7 alpha subunit, alone or in combination with various beta and gamma subunits at a density of -40,000 cells/well into a 96-well black, clear-bottom, PDL-coated plate.
  • the assay can be adapted to 384-well or 1 ,536-well format, if desired, using
  • the plate is then incubated in growth media, with or without selective antibiotic, overnight at 37°C at 5% C0 2 , 95% humidity, in preparation for the assay.
  • growth media with or without selective antibiotic, overnight at 37°C at 5% C0 2 , 95% humidity, in preparation for the assay.
  • the procedure is very similar, though optimal densities of cells, media and subsequent assay components can be fine-tuned for the particular cell line or isoform.
  • the media is flicked from the cells and the wells washed once with 50 ⁇ _ ⁇ 11 assay buffer ( I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3).
  • Membrane potential dye is then added to each well of the 96-well plate (50 ⁇ ),
  • the 96-well plate containing dye- loaded cells is then loaded directly onto the plate reader without aspirating the dye solution and without any further washing of the cells.
  • the fluorescence of cells is measured using a fluorescence plate reader (FLIPR TETRA ® or FLIPR384®, MDS, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA).
  • the assay can be performed as a screening assay as well, with the test articles present in standard amounts (e.g. 10 ⁇ ) in only one or two wells of a multi-well plate during the primary screen. Hits in this screen are typically profiled more exhaustively (multiple times), subjected to dose-response or competition assays and tested in counter screens against other voltage-gate sodium channels or other biologically relevant target molecules. Electrophysiology Assay
  • hNa v 1.7 expressing HE -293 cells were plated on 35 mm culture dishes pre-coated with poly-D-lysine in standard DMEM culture media (Mediatech, Inc., Herndon, VA) and incubated in a 5% C0 2 incubator at 37°C. Cultured cells 5 were used approximately 12 - 48 hours after plating.
  • Electrophysiology On the day of experimentation, the 35 mm dish was placed on the stage of an inverted microscope equipped with a perfusion system that continuously perfuses the culture dish with fresh recording media. A gravity driven superfusion system was used to apply test solutions directly to the cell under
  • This system consists of an array of glass pipette glass connected to a motorized horizontal translator. The outlet of the shooter was positioned
  • Borosilicate glass pipettes have resistance values between 1 .5 and 2.0 ⁇ when filled with pipette
  • Voltage protocols After establishing the whole-cell configuration in voltage clamp mode, voltage protocols were run to establish the 1 ) test potential, 2) holding potential, and 3) the conditioning potential for each cell.
  • an estimate of the affinity for the inactivated state of the channel (K,) was generated using the following protocol. From the negative, no residual inactivation, holding potential, the cell was depolarized to the conditioning voltage for 2-5 seconds, returned to the negative holding potential for 10 -20 ms to relieve fast inactivation and then depolarized to the test potential for -15 ms. This voltage protocol was repeated every 10- 15 seconds, first to establish a baseline in the absence of the test compound, then in the presence of the test compound.
  • test compound was applied and block of the current elicited by the test pulse assessed. In some cases, multiple cumulative concentrations were applied to identify a concentration that blocked between 40- 60 % of this current. Washout of the compound was attempted by superfusing with control solution once steady-state block was observed. An estimate of the Ki was calculated as follows:
  • Ki [drug]* ⁇ FR/( l -FR) ⁇ , Eq. 1 where [drug] is the concentration of a drug, and
  • FR I(after drug)/I(control), Eq. 2 where I is the peak current amplitude. If multiple concentrations were used, K, was determined from the fit of a logistic equation to FRs plotted against corresponding drug concentrations.
  • the voltage clamp protocol to examine hNa v l .7 currents was as follows. First, the standard current-voltage relationship was tested by pulsing the cell from the holding voltage (Vh) of - 120 mV by a series of 5 msec long square- shaped test pulses incrementing in +10 mV steps over the membrane voltage range of -90 mV to + 60 mV at the pace of stimulation of 0.5 Hz. This procedure determines the voltage that elicits the maximal current (V max ).
  • Vh was re-set to - 120 mV and a steady-state inactivation (SSIN) curve was taken by the standard double-pulse protocol: 100 ms depolarizing pre-pulse was incremented in steps of +10 mV (voltage range from -90mV to 0 mV) immediately followed by the 5ms long test pulse to - 10 mV at the pace of stimulation of 0.2 Hz. This procedure determines the voltage of full inactivation (Vf U n).
  • the cell was repeatedly stimulated with the following protocol, first in the absence of the test compound then in its presence.
  • the protocol consisted of depolarizing the cell from the holding potential of - 120 mV to the Vfun value for 4.5 seconds then repolarizing the cell to the holding potential for 10 ms before applying the test pulse to the V max for 5 ms.
  • the amount of inhibition produced by the test compound was determined by comparing the current amplitude elicited by the test pulse in the absence and presence of the compound.
  • the voltage clamp protocol to examine hNa v 1.7 currents was as follows. After establishing the whole-cell configuration in voltage clamp mode, two voltage protocols were run to establish: 1 ) the holding potential; and 2) the test potential for each cell.
  • Resting block To determine a membrane potential at which the majority of channels are in the resting state, a standard steady-state inactivation (SSIN) protocol was run using 100 ms prepulses x 10 mV depolarizing steps. The holding potential for testing resting block (Vhi ) was 20 mV more hyperpolarized than the first potential where inactivation was observed with the inactivation protocol.
  • SSIN steady-state inactivation
  • the compound testing protocol was a series of 10ms depolarizations from the Vhi (determined from the SSIN) to the Vt (determined from the I-V protocol) repeated every 10- 15 seconds. After a stable baseline was established, a high concentration of a test compound (highest concentration solubility permits or that which provides -50% block) was applied and block of the current assessed.
  • K r [drug]* ⁇ FR/( l -FR) ⁇ , Eq. 3 where [drug] is the concentration of a drug, and
  • FR I(after drug)/I(control), Eq. 2 where I is the peak current amplitude and was used for estimating resting block dissociation constant, K r .
  • Block of inactivated channels To assess the block of inactivated channels the holding potential was depolarized such that 20-50% of the current amplitude was reduced when pulsed to the same Vt as above. The magnitude of this depolarization depends upon the initial current amplitude and the rate of current loss due to slow inactivation. This was the second holding potential (Vh2). The current reduction was recorded to determine the fraction of available channels at this potential (h).
  • K app [drug]* ⁇ FR/(l -FR) ⁇ , Eq. 5 where [drug] is the concentration of a drug.
  • Data analysis Data was analyzed off-line using Clampfit software (pClamp, v. 8; Axon Instruments) and graphed using GraphPad Prism (v. 4.0 or higher) software.
  • mice are weighed and given either the compound of interest administered i.p. or p.o., or the appropriate volume of vehicle (for example, 10 % Tween-80 or 0.9 % saline, and other pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles) as control. Fifteen minutes after the i.p. dosing, and 30 minutes after the p.o. dosing mice are injected with formalin (20 ⁇ . of 5% formaldehyde solution in saline) into the dorsal surface of the right hind paw, Mice are transferred to the Plexiglass jars and monitored for the amount of time spent licking or biting the injected paw.
  • vehicle for example, 10 % Tween-80 or 0.9 % saline, and other pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles
  • Periods of licking and biting are recorded in 5-minute intervals for 1 hour after the formalin injection. All experiments are done in a blinded manner during the light cycle. The early phase of the formalin response is measured as licking / biting between 0-5 minutes, and the late phase is measured from 15-50 minutes. Differences between vehicle and drug treated groups can be analyzed by one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA). A P value ⁇ 0.05 is considered significant. Compounds are considered to be efficacious for treating acute and chronic pain if they have activity in blocking both the early and second phase of formalin-induced paw-licking activity.
  • Test Animals Each experiment uses rats weighing between 200-260 g at the start of the experiment. The rats are group-housed and have free access to food and water at all times, except prior to oral administration of a test compound when food is removed for 16 h before dosing.
  • a control group acts as a comparison to rats treated with a Compound of the Invention. The control group is administered the carrier as used for the test compound. The volume of earner administered to the control group is the same as the volume of carrier and test compound administered to the test group.
  • FCA Freund's complete adjuvant
  • the animal is assessed for response to noxious mechanical stimuli by determining the paw withdrawal threshold (PWT), or to noxious thermal stimuli by determining the paw withdrawal latency (PWL), as described below.
  • Rats are then administered a single injection of either a test compound or 30 mg/Kg of a positive control compound (indomethacin) ), or an equal volume of vehicle as a negative control.
  • Responses to noxious mechanical or thermal stimuli are then determined 1 , 3, 5 and 24 hours post administration (admin).
  • Percentage reversal of hyperalgesia for each animal is defined as: [(post administration PWT or PWL)-(pre-administration PWT or PWL)]
  • the partial sciatic nerve ligation model of neuropathic pain is used to produce neuropathic hyperalgesia in rats (Seltzer et al., Pain 43:205- 218 (1990)). Partial ligation of the left sciatic nerve is performed under
  • isoflurane/02 inhalation anesthesia Following induction of anesthesia, the left thigh of the rat is shaved and the sciatic nerve exposed at high thigh level through a small incision and is carefully cleared of surrounding connective tissues at a site near the trocanther just distal to the point at which the posterior biceps semitendinosus nerve branches off of the common sciatic nerve.
  • a 7-0 silk suture is inserted into the nerve with a 3/8 curved, reversed-cutting mini-needle and tightly ligated so that the dorsal V 3 to 1 ⁇ 2 of the nerve thickness is held within the ligature.
  • the wound is closed with a single muscle suture (4-0 nylon (Vicryl)) and vetbond tissue glue. Following surgery, the wound area is dusted with antibiotic powder. Sham-treated rats undergo an identical surgical procedure except that the sciatic nerve is not manipulated.
  • mice Following surgery, animals are weighed and placed on a warm pad until they recover from anesthesia. Animals are then returned to their home cages until behavioral testing begins. The animals are assessed for response to noxious mechanical stimuli by determining PWT, as described below, prior to surgery (baseline), then immediately prior to and 1 , 3, and 5 hours after drug administration for the ipsiiateral (same side as the injury) rear paw of the animal. Percentage reversal of neuropathic hyperalgesia is defined as:
  • Tactile Allodynia Sensitivity to non-noxious mechanical stimuli can be measured in animals to assess tactile allodynia. Rats are transferred to an elevated testing cage with a wire mesh floor and allowed to acclimate for five to ten minutes. A series of von Frey monofilaments are applied to the plantar surface of the hindpaw to determine the animal's withdrawal threshold. The first filament used possesses a buckling weight of 9.1 gms (.96 log value) and is applied up to five times to see if it elicits a withdrawal response. If the animal has a withdrawal response, then the next lightest filament in the series would be applied up to five times to determine if it also could elicit a response.
  • the rat's paw is placed on a small platform, and weight is applied in a graded manner up to a maximum of 250 grams. The endpoint is taken as the weight at which the paw is completely withdrawn.
  • PWT is determined once for each rat at each time point. PWT can be measured only in the injured paw, or in both the injured and non-injured paw.
  • mechanical hyperalgesia associated with nerve injury induced pain can be assessed in rats. Rats are tested prior to surgery to determine a baseline, or normal, PWT. Rats are tested again 2 to 3 weeks post- surgery, prior to, and at different times after (e.g. 1 , 3, 5 and 24 hr) drug
  • Compounds of the Invention can be tested for in vivo anticonvulsant activity after i.v., p.o., or i.p. injection using any of a number of anticonvulsant tests in mice or rats, including the maximum electroshock seizure test (MES).
  • MES maximum electroshock seizure test
  • a tonic seizure is defined as a hindlimb extension in excess of 90 degrees from the plane of the body. Results can be treated in a quantal manner.
  • Compounds of the Invention can be administered to a mammal in the form of a raw chemical without any other components present.
  • Compounds of the Invention can also be administered to a mammal as part of a pharmaceutical composition containing the compound combined with a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can be selected from pharmaceutically acceptable excipients and auxiliaries.
  • compositions within the scope of the present disclosure include all compositions where a Compound of the Invention is combined with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • the Compound of the Invention is present in the composition in an amount that is effective to achieve its intended therapeutic purpose. While individual needs may vary, a determination of optimal ranges of effective amounts of each compound is within the skill of the art.
  • a Compound of the Invention can be administered to a mammal, e.g. , a human, orally at a dose of from about 0.0025 to about 1500 mg per kg body weight of the mammal, or an equivalent amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug, or solvate thereof, per day to treat the particular disorder.
  • a useful oral dose of a Compound of the Invention administered to a mammal is from about 0.0025 to about 50 mg per kg body weight of the mammal, or an equivalent amount of the pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug, or solvate thereof.
  • a unit oral dose may comprise from about 0.01 mg to about 1 g of the Compound of the Invention, e.g., about 0.01 mg to about 500 mg, about 0.01 mg to about 250 mg, about 0.01 mg to about 100 mg, 0.01 mg to about 50 mg, e.g. , about 0.1 mg to about 10 mg, of the compound.
  • the unit dose can be administered one or more times daily, e.g. , as one or more tablets or capsules, each containing from about 0.01 mg to about 1 g of the compound, or an equivalent amount of a
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered to any animal that may experience the beneficial effects of a Compound of the Invention.
  • animals are mammals, e.g. , humans and companion animals, although the disclosure is not intended to be so limited.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered by any means that achieves its intended purpose.
  • administration can be by the oral, parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, transdermal, intranasal, transmucosal, rectal, intravaginal or buccal route, or by inhalation.
  • the dosage administered and route of administration will vary, depending upon the circumstances of the particular subject, and taking into account such factors as age, gender, health, and weight of the recipient, condition or disorder to be treated, kind of concurrent treatment, if any, frequency of treatment, and the nature of the effect desired.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered orally and is formulated into tablets, dragees, capsules or an oral liquid preparation.
  • the oral formulation comprises extruded multiparticulates comprising the Compound of the Invention.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered rectally, and is formulated in suppositories.
  • composition of the present disclosure can be administered by injection.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered transdermally.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered by inhalation or by intranasal or transmucosal administration.
  • composition of the present disclosure can be administered by the intravaginal route.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can contain from about 0.01 to 99 percent by weight, and preferably from about 0.25 to 75 percent by weight, of active compound(s).
  • a method of the present disclosure such as a method for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels in an animal in need thereof, can further comprise administering a second therapeutic agent to the animal in combination with a Compound of the Invention.
  • the other therapeutic agent is administered in an effective amount.
  • Effective amounts of the other therapeutic agents are known to those skilled in the art. However, it is well within the skilled artisan's purview to determine the other therapeutic agent's optimal effective-amount range.
  • Compounds of the Invention i.e., the first therapeutic agent
  • the second therapeutic agent can act additively or, in one embodiment, synergistically.
  • the second therapeutic agent can be used to treat a disorder or condition that is different from the disorder or condition for which the first therapeutic agent is being administered, and which disorder or condition may or may not be a condition or disorder as defined herein.
  • a Compound of the Invention is administered concurrently with a second therapeutic agent; for example, a single composition comprising both an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention and an effective amount of the second therapeutic agent can be administered.
  • the present disclosure further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a combination of a Compound of the Invention, the second therapeutic agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • a first pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention and a second pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of the second therapeutic agent can be concurrently administered.
  • an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention is administered prior or subsequent to administration of an effective amount of the second
  • the Compound of the Invention is a compound having the Compound of the Invention.
  • the second therapeutic agent exerts its therapeutic effect
  • the 5 second therapeutic agent is administered while the Compound of the Invention exerts its therapeutic effect for treating a disorder or condition.
  • the second therapeutic agent can be an opioid agonist, a non-opioid
  • analgesic a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agent, an antimigraine agent, a Cox-II inhibitor, a ⁇ -adrenergic blocker, an anticonvulsant, an antidepressant, an anticancer
  • agent an agent for treating addictive disorder
  • agent for treating Parkinson's an agent for treating Parkinson's
  • an agent for treating anxiety an agent for treating epilepsy, an agent for treating a seizure, an agent for treating a stroke, an agent for treating a pruritic condition, an agent for treating psychosis, an agent for treating ALS, an agent for treating a cognitive disorder, an agent for treating a migraine, an agent for treating anxiety, an agent for treating epilepsy, an agent for treating a seizure, an agent for treating a stroke, an agent for treating a pruritic condition, an agent for treating psychosis, an agent for treating ALS, an agent for treating a cognitive disorder, an agent for treating a migraine, an agent for treating anxiety, an agent for treating epilepsy, an agent for treating a seizure, an agent for treating a stroke, an agent for treating a pruritic condition, an agent for treating psychosis, an agent for treating ALS, an agent for treating a cognitive disorder, an agent for treating a migraine, an agent for treating anxiety, an agent for treating epilepsy, an agent for treating a seizure, an agent for treating a
  • agent for treating vomiting an agent for treating dyskinesia, or an agent for treating depression, or a mixture thereof.
  • Examples of useful opioid agonists include, but are not limited to, alfentanil, allylprodine, alphaprodine, anileridine, benzylmorphine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, clonitazene, codeine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, dezocine,
  • dimepheptanol dimethylthiambutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, eptazocine, ethoheptazine, ethylmethylthiambutene, ethyimorphine, etonitazene, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, hydroxypethidine, isomethadone, ketobemidone, levorphanol, levophenacylmorphan, lofentanil, meperidine, meptazinol, metazocine,
  • 25 methadone, metopon, morphine, myrophine, nalbuphine, narceine, nicomorphine, norlevorphanol, normethadone, nalorphine, normorphine, norpipanone, opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, papaveretum, pentazocine, phenadoxone, phenomorphan, phenazocine, phenoperidine, piminodine, piritramide, proheptazine, promedol, properidine, propiram, propoxyphene, sufentanil, tilidine, tramadol, pharmaceutically
  • the opioid agonist is selected from codeine, hydromorphone, hydrocodone, oxycodone, dihydrocodeine, dihydromorphine, morphine, tramadol, oxymorphone, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • non-opioid analgesics examples include non-steroidal antiinflammatory agents, such as aspirin, ibuprofen, diclofenac, naproxen, benoxaprofen, flurbiprofen, fenoprofen, flubufen, ketoprofen, indoprofen, piroprofen, carprofen, oxaprozin, pramoprofen, muroprofen, trioxaprofen, suprofen, aminoprofen, tiaprofenic acid, fluprofen, bucloxic acid, indomethacin, sulindac, tolmetin, zomepirac, tiopinac, zidometacin, acemetacin, fentiazac, clidanac, oxpinac, mefenamic acid, meclofenamic acid, flufenamic acid, niflumic acid, tolfenamic acid,
  • non-opioid analgesics include the following, non limiting, chemical classes of analgesic, antipyretic, nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs: salicylic acid derivatives, including aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline magnesium trisalicylate, salsalate, diflunisal, salicylsalicylic acid, sulfasalazine, and olsalazin; para aminophennol derivatives including acetaminophen and phenacetin; indole and indene acetic acids, including indomethacin, sulindac, and etodolac; heteroaryl acetic acids, including tolmetin, diclofenac, and ketorolac; anthranilic acids (fenamates), including mefenamic acid, and meclofenamic acid; enolic acids, including oxicams (piroxicam, tenoxicam), and pyrazolidinediones (phenylbutylbut
  • Therapeutics 617-57 Perry B. Molinhoff and Raymond W. Ruddon eds., 9th ed 1996) and Glen R. Hanson, Analgesic, Antipyretic and Anti Inflammatory Drugs in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy Vol. II 1 196- 1221 (A.R. Gennaro ed. 19th ed. 1995) which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • Suitable Cox-II inhibitors and 5-lipoxygenase inhibitors, as well as combinations thereof, are described in U.S. Patent No. 6, 136,839, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • Examples of useful Cox II inhibitors include, but are not limited to, rofecoxib, and celecoxib.
  • useful antimigraine agents include, but are not limited to, alpiropride, bromocriptine, dihydroergotamine, dolasetron, ergocornine,
  • ⁇ -adrenergic blockers include, but are not limited to, acebutolol, alprenolol, amosulabol, arotinolol, atenolol, befunolol, betaxolol, bevantolol, bisoprolol, bopindolol, bucumolol, bufetolol, bufuralol, bunitrolol, bupranolol, butidrine hydrochloride, butofilolol, carazolol, carteolol, carvedilol, celiprolol, cetamolol, cloranolol, dilevalol, epanolol, esmolol, indenolol, labetalol, levobunolol, mepindolol, metipranolol, metoprolol, moprol
  • useful anticonvulsants include, but are not limited to, acetylpheneturide, albutoin, aloxidone, aminoglutethimide, 4-amino-3- hydroxybutyric acid, atrolactamide, beclamide, buramate, calcium bromide, carbamazepine, cinromide, clomethiazole, clonazepam, decimemide, diethadione, dimethadione, doxenitroin, eterobarb, ethadione, ethosuximide, ethotoin, felbamate, fluoresone, gabapentin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, lamotrigine, magnesium bromide, magnesium sulfate, mephenytoin, mephobarbital, metharbital, methetoin, methsuximide, 5-methyl-5-(3-phenanthryl)-hydantoin, 3-methyl-5-phenylhydantoin, narcobar
  • Examples of useful antidepressants include, but are not limited to, binedaline, caroxazone, citalopram, (S)-citalopram, dimethazan, fencamine, indalpine, indeloxazine hydrocholoride, nefopam, nomifensine, oxitriptan, oxypertine, paroxetine, sertraline, thiazesim, trazodone, benmoxine, iproclozide, iproniazid, isocarboxazid, nialamide, octamoxin, phenelzine, cotinine, rolicyprine, rolipram, maprotiline, metralindole, mianserin, mirtazepine, adinazolam, amitriptyline, amitriptylinoxide, amoxapine, butriptyline, clomipramine, demexiptiline
  • useful anticancer agents include, but are not limited to, acivicin, aclarubicin, acodazole hydrochloride, acronine, adozelesin, aldesleukin, altretamine, ambomycin, ametantrone acetate, aminoglutethimide, amsacrine, anastrozole, anthramycin, asparaginase, asperlin, azacitidine, azetepa, azotomycin, batimastat, benzodepa, bicalutamide, bisantrene hydrochloride, bisnafide dimesylate, bizelesin, bleomycin sulfate, brequinar sodium, bropirimine, busulfan, cactinomycin, calusterone, caracemide, carbetimer, carboplatin, carmustine, carubicin
  • hydrochloride carzelesin, cedefingol, chlorambucil, cirolemycin, and cisplatin.
  • Therapeutic agents useful for treating an addictive disorder include, but are not limited to, methadone, desipramine, amantadine, fluoxetine, buprenorphine, an opiate agonist, 3-phenoxypyridine, or a serotonin antagonist.
  • Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating Parkinson's disease and parkinsonism include, but are not limited to, carbidopa/levodopa, pergolide, bromocriptine, ropinirole, pramipexole, entacapone, tolcapone, selegiline, amantadine, and trihexyphenidyl hydrochloride.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating anxiety include, but are not limited to, benzodiazepines, such as alprazolam, brotizolam, chlordiazepoxide, clobazam, clonazepam, clorazepate, demoxepam, diazepam, estazolam, flumazenil, flurazepam, halazepam, lorazepam, midazolam, nitrazepam, nordazepam, oxazepam, prazepam, quazepam, temazepam, and triazolam; non-benzodiazepine agents, such as buspirone, gepirone, ipsapirone, tiospirone, zolpicone, Zolpidem, and zaleplon; tranquilizers, such as barbituates, e.g., amobarbital, aprobarbital, butabarbital, butalbital, mephobarbital
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating epilepsy or seizure include, but are not limited to, carbamazepine, ethosuximide, gabapentin, lamotrigine, phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone, valproic acid, trimethadione, benzodiazepines, gamma-vinyl GABA, acetazolamide, and felbamate.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating stroke include, but are not limited to, anticoagulants such as heparin, agents that break up clots such as streptokinase or tissue plasminogen activator, agents that reduce swelling such as mannitol or corticosteroids, and acetylsalicylic acid.
  • anticoagulants such as heparin
  • agents that break up clots such as streptokinase or tissue plasminogen activator
  • agents that reduce swelling such as mannitol or corticosteroids
  • acetylsalicylic acid acetylsalicylic acid
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating a pruritic condition include, but are not limited to, naltrexone; nalmefene; danazol; tricyclics such as amitriptyline, imipramine, and doxepin; antidepressants such as those given below; menthol; camphor; phenol; pramoxine; capsaicin; tar; steroids; and antihistamines.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating psychosis include, but are not limited to, phenothiazines such as chlorpromazine hydrochloride, mesoridazine besylate, and thoridazine hydrochloride; thioxanthenes such as chloroprothixene and thiothixene hydrochloride; clozapine; risperidone; olanzapine; quetiapine; quetiapine fumarate; haloperidol; haloperidol decanoate; loxapine succinate; molindone hydrochloride; pimozide; and ziprasidone.
  • phenothiazines such as chlorpromazine hydrochloride, mesoridazine besylate, and thoridazine hydrochloride
  • thioxanthenes such as chloroprothixene and thiothixene hydrochloride
  • clozapine risperi
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating ALS include, but are not limited to, baclofen, neurotrophic factors, riluzole, tizanidine, benzodiazepines such as clonazepan and dantrolene.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating cognitive disorders include, but are not limited to, agents for treating dementia such as tacrine;
  • donepezil ibuprofen
  • antipsychotic drugs such as thioridazine and haloperidol
  • antidepressant drugs such as those given below.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating a migraine include, but are not limited to, sumatriptan; methysergide; ergotamine; caffeine; and beta-blockers such as propranolol, verapamil, and divalproex.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating vomiting include, but are not limited to, 5-HT3 receptor antagonists such as ondansetron, dolasetron, granisetron, and tropisetron; dopamine receptor antagonists such as prochlorperazine, thiethylperazine, chlorpromazine, metoclopramide, and domperidone;
  • glucocorticoids such as dexamethasone
  • benzodiazepines such as lorazepam and alprazolam.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating dyskinesia include, but are not limited to, reserpine and tetrabenazine.
  • useful therapeutic agents for treating depression include, but are not limited to, tricyclic antidepressants such as amitryptyline, amoxapine, bupropion, clomipramine, desipramine, doxepin, imipramine, maprotiline, nefazadone, nortriptyline, protriptyline, trazodone, trimipramine, and venlafaxine; selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors such as citalopram, (S)-citalopram, fluoxetine, fiuvoxamine, paroxetine, and setraline; monoamine oxidase inhibitors such as isocarboxazid, pargyline, phenelzine, and tranylcypromine; and psychostimulants such as dextroamphetamine and methylphenidate.
  • tricyclic antidepressants such as amitryptyline, amoxapine, bupropion, clomipramine, desi
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure is manufactured in a manner which itself will be known in view of the instant disclosure, for example, by means of conventional mixing, granulating, dragee-making, dissolving, extrusion, or lyophilizing processes.
  • pharmaceutical compositions for oral use can be obtained by combining the active compound with solid excipients, optionally grinding the resulting mixture and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired or necessary, to obtain tablets or dragee cores.
  • Suitable excipients include fillers such as saccharides (for example, lactose, sucrose, mannitol or sorbitol), cellulose preparations, calcium phosphates (for example, tricalcium phosphate or calcium hydrogen phosphate), as well as binders such as starch paste (using, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, or potato starch), gelatin, tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and/or polyvinyl pyrrolidone.
  • saccharides for example, lactose, sucrose, mannitol or sorbitol
  • cellulose preparations for example, calcium phosphates (for example, tricalcium phosphate or calcium hydrogen phosphate)
  • binders such as starch paste (using, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, or potato starch), gelatin, tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl
  • one or more disintegrating agents can be added, such as the above-mentioned starches and also carboxymethyl-starch, cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings that are resistant to gastric juices.
  • suitable coatings that are resistant to gastric juices.
  • concentrated saccharide solutions can be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • suitable cellulose preparations such as acetylcellulose phthalate or hydroxypropymethyl-cellulose phthalate can be used.
  • Dye stuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings, for example, for
  • Examples of other pharmaceutical preparations that can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, or soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • the push-fit capsules can contain a compound in the form of granules, which can be mixed with fillers such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers, or in the form of extruded multiparticulates.
  • the active compounds are preferably dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils or liquid paraffin.
  • stabilizers can be added.
  • Possible pharmaceutical preparations for rectal administration include, for example, suppositories, which consist of a combination of one or more active compounds with a suppository base.
  • Suitable suppository bases include natural and synthetic triglycerides, and paraffin hydrocarbons, among others. It is also possible to use gelatin rectal capsules consisting of a combination of active compound with a base material such as, for example, a liquid triglyceride, polyethylene glycol, or paraffin hydrocarbon.
  • Suitable formulations for parenteral administration include aqueous solutions of the active compound in a water-soluble form such as, for example, a water-soluble salt, alkaline solution, or acidic solution.
  • a suspension of the active compound can be prepared as an oily suspension.
  • Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles for such as suspension may include fatty oils (for example, sesame oil), synthetic fatty acid esters (for example, ethyl oleate), triglycerides, or a polyethylene glycol such as polyethylene glycol-400 (PEG-400).
  • An aqueous suspension may contain one or more substances to increase the viscosity of the suspension, including, for example, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, and/or dextran.
  • the suspension may optionally contain stabilizers.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (80 mL), filtered through a pad of Celite, the Celite was washed with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic fractions were concentrated to yield the crude aniline as a brown paste.
  • the crude product was dissolved in hot acetonitrile ( 150 mL) and a hot solution of tosic acid hydrate (17.91 g, 1 .05 eq.) in acetonitrile (25 mL) was added. The resulting solution was stirred and allowed to cool to room temperature.
  • a sealed pressure bottle containing compound 9 (956 mg, 5.2 mmol), 2-(4-(5- chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l ,3,3-dioxaborolane (14) ( 1.8 g, 5.2 mmol), PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 (292 mg, 0.42 mmol), and Cs 2 C0 3 (3.4 g, 10.4 mmol) in DME (6 mL), EtOH (3 mL), and H 2 0 (6 mL) was heated at 95°C for 4 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was adjusted to pH 4 with 4N HCl aqueous solution.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with 100 mL water, acidified to pH 5 with aqueous 4N HC1, and extracted with 2 x 100 mL EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give 2-(4-(4- cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid as a light brown solid. The material was used in the next step without purification.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure provides pyrimidine diol amides of Formula (I), and the pharmaceutically acceptable solvates and prodrugs thereof, wherein A1, X, A2, W1, W2, W3, R1, R2, and R4 are defined as set forth in the specification. The present disclosure is also directed to the use of compounds of Formula (I) to treat a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels. Compounds of the present disclosure are especially useful for treating pain.

Description

PYRIMIDINE DIOL AMIDES AS SODIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Field of the Invention
This invention is in the field of medicinal chemistry. The invention provides novel pyrimidine diol amides and the use of these compounds as blockers of voltage- gated sodium (Na+) channels.
Background Art
Voltage-gated sodium channels (VGSCs) are found in all excitable cells.
Sodium channels are primarily responsible for generating the rapid upstroke of the action potential in neuronal cells of the central nervous system (CNS) and peripheral nervous system (PNS). In this manner sodium channels are essential to the initiation and propagation of electrical signals in the nervous system. Proper function of sodium channels is therefore necessary for normal function of the neuron.
Consequently, aberrant sodium channel function is thought to underlie a variety of medical disorders (See Hubner et al., Hum. Mol. Genet. 1 1 :2435-2445 (2002) for a general review of inherited ion channel disorders) including epilepsy (Yogeeswari et al, Curr. Drug Target 5:589-602 (2004)), arrhythmia (Noble, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 99:5755-5756 (2002)), myotonia (Cannon, Kidney Int. 57:772-779 (2000)), and pain (Wood et al., J. Neurobiol., 61 :55-71 (2004)).
VGSCs are composed of one a-subunit, which forms the core of the channel and is responsible for voltage-dependent gating and ion permeation, and several auxiliary β-subunits (see, e.g., Chahine et al., CNS & Neurological Disorders-Drug Targets 7: 144-158 (2008) and Kyle and Ilyin, J. Med. Chem. 50:2583-2588 (2007)). a-Subunits are large proteins composed of four homologous domains. Each domain contains six a-helical transmembrane spanning segments. There are currently nine known members of the family of voltage-gated sodium channel cc-subunits. Names for this family include SCNx, SCNAx, and Navx.x (see Table 1 , below). The VGSC family has been phylogenetically divided into two subfamilies Navl.x (all but SCN6A) and Nav2.x (SCN6A). The Navl.x subfamily can be functionally subdivided into two groups, those which are sensitive to blocking by tetrodotoxin (TTX- sensitive or TTX-s) and those which are resistant to blocking by tetrodotoxin (TTX- resistant or TTX-r).
There are three members of the subgroup of TTX-resistant sodium channels. The SCN5A gene product (Nav1.5, HI) is almost exclusively expressed in cardiac tissue and has been shown to underlie a variety of cardiac arrhythmias and other conduction disorders (Liu et al, Am. J. Pharmacogenomics 3 : 173- 179 (2003)). Consequently, blockers of Nav1.5 have found clinical utility in treatment of such disorders (Srivatsa et al., Curr. Cardiol. Rep. 4:401 -410 (2002)). The remaining TTX-resistant sodium channels, Nav1.8 (SCNIOA, PN3, SNS) and Nav 1.9 (SCNl 1 A, NaN, SNS2) are expressed in the peripheral nervous system and show preferential expression in primary nociceptive neurons. Human genetic variants of these channels have not been associated with any inherited clinical disorder. However, aberrant expression of Nav1.8 has been found in the CNS of human multiple sclerosis (MS) patients and also in a rodent model of MS (Black et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 97: 1 1598-1 15602 (2000)). Evidence for involvement in nociception is both associative (preferential expression in nociceptive neurons) and direct (genetic knockout). Nav1.8-null mice exhibited typical nociceptive behavior in response to acute noxious stimulation but had significant deficits in referred pain and
hyperalgesia (Laird et al., J. Neurosci. 22:8352-8356 (2002)).
TABLE 1
Voltage-gated sodium channel gene family
Gene TTX IC Disease
Type Tissue Distribution Indications
Symbol (nM) Association
Pain, seizures,
Navl.l SCN 1 A CNS/PNS 10 Epilepsy
neurodegeneration
Epilepsy,
Nav1.2 SCN2A CNS 10 Epilepsy
neurodegeneration
Nav1.3 SCN3A CNS 1 5 - Pain
Nav1.4 SCN4A Skeletal muscle 25 Myotonia Myotonia
Navl.5 SCN5A Heart muscle 2,000 Arrhythmia Arrhythmia
Pain, movement
Nav1.6 SCN8A CNS/PNS 6 - disorders lMav1.7 SCN9A PNS 25 Erythermalgia Pain
Nav1.8 SC 10A PNS 50,000 - Pain
Nav1.9 SCN 1 1 A PNS 1 ,000 - Pain The Nav1.7 (PN1, SCN9A) VGSC is sensitive to blocking by tetrodotoxin and is preferentially expressed in peripheral sympathetic and sensory neurons. The SCN9A gene has been cloned from a number of species, including human, rat, and rabbit and shows ~90 % amino acid identity between the human and rat genes (Toledo-Aral et al„ Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 1527- 1532 (1997)).
An increasing body of evidence suggests that Navl .7 plays a key role in various pain states, including acute, inflammatory and/or neuropathic pain. Deletion of the SCN9A gene in nociceptive neurons of mice led to an increase in mechanical and thermal pain thresholds and reduction or abolition of inflammatory pain responses (Nassar et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 101 : 12706- 1271 1 (2004)).
Sodium channel-blocking agents have been reported to be effective in the treatment of various disease states, and have found particular use as local anesthetics, e.g., lidocaine and bupivacaine, and in the treatment of cardiac arrhythmias, e.g. , propafenone and amiodarone, and epilepsy, e.g., lamotrigine, phenytoin and carbamazepine (see Clare et al., Drug Discovery Today 5:506-5 10 (2000); Lai et al., Annu. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 44:371 -397 (2004); Anger et al., J. Med. Chem. 44: 1 15- 137 (2001), and Catterall, Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 8:57-65 (1987)). Each of these agents is believed to act by interfering with the rapid influx of sodium ions. Other sodium channel blockers such as BW619C89 and lifarizine have been shown to be neuroprotective in animal models of global and focal ischemia (Graham et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 269:854-859 (1994); Brown et al., British J.
Pharmacol. 1 15: 1425-1432 (1995)).
It has also been reported that sodium channel-blocking agents can be useful in the treatment of pain, including acute, chronic, inflammatory, neuropathic, and other types of pain such as rectal, ocular, and submandibular pain typically associated with paroxysmal extreme pain disorder; see, for example, Kyle and Ilyin., J. Med. Chem. 50:2583-2588 (2007); Wood et al., J. Neurobiol. 61 :55-71 (2004); Baker et al., TRENDS in Pharmacological Sciences 22:27-31 (2001 ); and Lai et al., Current
Opinion in Neurobiology 13:291 -297 (2003); the treatment of neurological disorders such as epilepsy, seizures, epilepsy with febrile seizures, epilepsy with benign familial neonatal infantile seizures, inherited pain disorders, e.g., primary
erthermalgia and paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, familial hemiplegic migraine, and movement disorder; and the treatment of other psychiatric disorders such as autism, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, and mental retardation; see, for example, Chahine et al., CNS & Neurological Disorders-Drug Targets 7: 144- 158 (2008) and Meisler and Kearney, J. Clin. Invest. 1 15:2010-2017 (2005). In addition to the above- mentioned clinical uses, carbamazepine, lidocaine and phenytoin are used to treat neuropathic pain, such as from trigeminal neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy and other forms of nerve damage (Taylor and Meldrum, Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 16:309-3 16 ( 1995)). Furthermore, based on a number of similarities between chronic pain and tinnitus, (Moller, Am. J. Otol. 18:577-585 (1997); Tonndorf, Hear. Res. 28:271 -275 ( 1987)) it has been proposed that tinnitus should be viewed as a form of chronic pain sensation (Simpson, et al., Tip. 20: 12-18 ( 1999)). Indeed, lidocaine and
carbamazepine have been shown to be efficacious in treating tinnitus (Majumdar, B. et al., Clin. Otolaryngol. 8: 175-180 (1983); Donaldson, Laryngol. Otol. 95:947-951 ( 1981 )).
Many patients with either acute or chronic pain disorders respond poorly to current pain therapies, and the development of resistance or insensitivity to opiates is common. In addition, many of the currently available treatments have undesirable side effects.
In view of the limited efficacy and/or unacceptable side-effects of the currently available agents, there is a pressing need for more effective and safer 5 analgesics that work by blocking sodium channels.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
In one aspect, the present disclosure provides pyrimidine diol amides represented by Formulae I-VIII, below, and the pharmaceutically acceptable solvates and prodrugs thereof, collectively referred to herein as "Compounds of the
10 Invention."
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides the use of Compounds of the Invention as blockers of sodium (Na+) channels.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels in a mammal, comprising 15 administering to the mammal an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a method for treating pain (e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to, neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain), comprising
administering an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention to a mammal in 20 need of such treatment. Specifically, the present disclosure provides a method for preemptive or palliative treatment of pain by administering an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention to a mammal in need of such treatment.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a method for treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy 25 with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease), manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia, comprising administering an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention to a mammal in need of such treatment.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a Compound of the Invention and one or more
pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a pharmaceutical composition for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium ion channels, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention in a mixture with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a method of modulating sodium channels in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of at least one Compound of the Invention.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides Compounds of the
Invention for use in treating pain in a mammal, e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to, neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides Compounds of the
Invention for use in treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease), manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia, in a mammal.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a radiolabeled Compound of the Invention and the use of such compounds as radioligands in any appropriately selected competitive binding assays and screening methodologies. Thus, the present disclosure further provides a method for screening a candidate compound for its ability to bind to a sodium channel or sodium channel subunit using a radiolabeled Compound of the Invention. In certain embodiments, the compound is radiolabeled with 3H, "C, or l 4C. This competitive binding assay can be conducted using any appropriately selected methodology. In one embodiment, the screening method comprises: i) introducing a fixed concentration of the radiolabeled compound to an in vitro preparation comprising a soluble or membrane-associated sodium channel, subunit or fragment under conditions that permit the radiolabeled compound to bind to the channel, subunit or fragment, respectively, to form a conjugate; ii) titrating the conjugate with a candidate compound; and iii) determining the ability of the candidate compound to displace the radiolabeled compound from said channel, subunit or fragment.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a Compound of the
Invention for use in the manufacture of a medicament for treating pain in a mammal. In one embodiment, the present disclosure provides the use of a Compound of the Invention in the manufacture of a medicament for palliative or preemptive treatment of pain, such as acute pain, chronic pain, or surgical pain.
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a Compound of the
Invention for use in the manufacture of a medicament for treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease), manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia, in a mammal.
Additional embodiments and advantages of the disclosure will be set forth, in part, in the description that follows, and will flow from the description, or can be learned by practice of the disclosure. The embodiments and advantages of the disclosure will be realized and attained by means of the elements and combinations particularly pointed out in the appended claims.
It is to be understood that both the foregoing summary and the following detailed description are exemplary and explanatory only, and are not restrictive of the 5 invention as claimed.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
One aspect of the present disclosure is based on the use of Compounds of the Invention as blockers of Na+ channels. In view of this property, Compounds of the Invention are useful for treating disorders responsive to the blockade of sodium ion 10 channels.
In one embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula I:
Figure imgf000009_0001
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein: 1 5 W 1 and W2 are N and W3 is CR3; or
W 1 and W3 are N and W2 is CR3; or
W2 and W3 are N and W1 is CR3;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; optionally substituted alkyl; optionally substituted cycloalkyl; aralkyl; (heterocyclo)alkyl;
20 (heteroaryl)alkyl; (amino)alkyl; (alkylamino)alkyl; (dialkylamino)alkyl;
carboxyalkyl; (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl; (carboxamido)alkyl; (cyano)alkyl;
alkoxyalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; and heteroalkyl;
R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or
R and R taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached 25 form a 3- to 8-membered optionally substituted heterocyclo; R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino; alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl;
dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; and alkoxyalkyl;
R4 is C2-6 dihydroxyalkyl;
A is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl, e.g. , optionally substituted phenyl and optionally substituted pyridyl;
X is selected from the group consisting of -0-; -S-; -SO-; -S02-; -(CR5aR5b)1 ; -NR6-; -S02NR7-; and -NR7S02-;
each R5a and R5b, which can be identical or different, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; and alkyl;
m is 0, 1 , 2, or 3;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl ; and
A2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl, e.g., optionally substituted phenyl and optionally substituted pyridyl.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula II:
Figure imgf000010_0001
II
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R8a and R8b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino; alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; carboxy; and alkoxycarbonyl; and Α' , Χ, W1, W\ W3, R' , R2, and R are as defined above in connection with Formula I.
In one embodiment, R8A and R8B are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula III:
Figure imgf000011_0001
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
A1, X, R8a, R8b, W', W2, W3, R1, R2, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-III, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
X is selected from the group consisting of -0-; -S-; -S02-; -(C )™-; and - NH-;
m is 0 or 1 ; and
A1, R8a, R8b, W1, W2, W3, R1, R2, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula IV:
Figure imgf000011_0002
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein: A 1 , R8a, R8b, W 1 , W2, W3, R1 , R2, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A 1 is selected from the group consistin
Figure imgf000012_0001
wherein:
R9a, R9b, RI Oa, RI Ob, Rl l a, R, l b, Rl 2\ and Rl 2b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino;
alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; carboxy; and alkoxycarbonyl; and
A2, X, R8a, R8b, W 1 , W2, W3, R1, R2, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In one embodiment, R9a, R9b, R, 0a, R10b, Rl l a, R, l b, Rl 2a, and Rl 2b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
W 1 and W2 are N and W3 is CR3;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C alkyl; and
A 1 , A2, X, R8a, R8b, R1 , R2, and R are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein: W1 and W3 are N and W2 is CR3;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C alkyl; and A1, A2, X, R8a, R8b, R1, R2, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
W2 and W3 are N and W1 is CR3;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C M alkyl; and A1, A2, X, R8a, R8b, R1, R2, and R4 are as defined above in connection with
Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae II-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R8a and R8b are hydrogen; and
A1 , X, W\ W2, W3, R1 , R2, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; carboxyalkyl; (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl; and (carboxamido)alkyl;
R2 is hydrogen; and
A1, A2, X, R8a, R8b, W1, W2, W3, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C alkyl;
R is hydrogen; and A1 , A2, X, R8a, R8b, W' , W2, W3, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R1 and R2 are each hydrogen; and
A1 , A2, X, R8a, R8 , W' , W2, W3, and R4 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R4 is a C2-4 dihydroxyalkyl; and
A1 , A2, X, W1 , W2, W3, R1, and R2 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
elected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000014_0001
A1 , A2, X, W\ W2, W3, R1 , and R2 are as defined above in connection with
Formulae I and II. In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R4 is:
OH
Λ ,ΟΗ
; and
A , A , X, W\ W, W\ R' , and Rz are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formulae I-IV, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
R4 is:
Figure imgf000015_0001
A1 , A2, X, W1 , W2, W3, R1 , and R2 are as defined above in connection with Formulae I and II.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula V:
Figure imgf000015_0002
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is defined above in connection with Formula I.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula VI:
Figure imgf000016_0001
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is defined above in connection with Formula I.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula VII:
Figure imgf000016_0002
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is defined above in connection with Formula I.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds represented by Formula VIII:
Figure imgf000016_0003
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is defined above in connection with Formula I.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is selected from the group consisting of A 1 - 1 and A'-2. In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is selected from the group consisting of A1- 1 and A '-2.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is A '-2.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is A'-2.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
A1 is A'-2; and
RI Oa and R,0b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
A' is A'-2; and
RIOa and RI Ob are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is A1-! ,
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein A1 is A1-! . In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae V or VI, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
A1 is A1-! ; and
R9a and R9b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
In another embodiment, compounds of the invention are compounds represented by Formulae VII or VIII, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
A1 is A1- ! ; and
R9a and R9b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; cyano; and haloalkyl.
In another embodiment, Compounds of the Invention are compounds of TABLE 2, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof.
Figure imgf000018_0001
Figure imgf000019_0001
Figure imgf000020_0001
Figure imgf000021_0001
Figure imgf000022_0001
The chemical names of the compound examples are provided in TABLE 3.
TABLE 3
Compound
Chemical Name
Example No.
(5)-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethy l)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)
1
pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(R)-6-{ 1 ,2-dihy droxyethy l)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)
2
pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(S)-2-(4-(4-cyanophenoxy)phenyl-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)
3
pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
( )-2-(4-(4-cyanophenoxy)phenyl-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)
4
pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(5)-2-(4-(4-cyano-2-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl-6-( 1 ,2-
5
dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(/?)-2-(4-(4-cyano-2-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl-6-( 1 ,2-
6
dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(/?)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( 1 , 2-
7
dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(S)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l , 2-
8
dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(#)-2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)pheny l)-6-( 1 , 2-
9
dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(5)-2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l , 2-
10
dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide ('5)-2-(4-(3-cyano-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-
11
( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(/?)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-
12
( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethy l)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(5)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-
13
(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(S)-methyl 2-(6-((S)- 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-
14 fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamido)
propanoate
(5)-2-(6-((S)- 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-
15 fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoic acid
N-((S)-1 -amino- 1 -oxopropan-2-yl)-6-((S)-l ,2-
16 dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fiuorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide
(5)-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-
17
(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(R)-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-
18
(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(5)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-((5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-
19
2-yl)oxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide
(R)-4-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)
20
pyrimidine-2-carboxamide
(S)-4-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)
21
pyrimidine-2-carboxamide
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a straight- or branched-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon containing 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , or 12 carbon atoms (i. e. , C \ . \ 2 alkyl) or the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., a C | alkyl such as methyl, a C2 alkyl such as ethyl, a C3 alkyl such as propyl or isopropyl, etc.)- In one embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a straight chain C M O alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a branched chain C j.jo alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a straight chain C |.6 alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a branched chain C i.6 alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a straight chain C ] .4 alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a branched chain C3.4 alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a straight or branched chain C2.6 alkyl group. In another embodiment, the alkyl group is chosen from a straight or branched chain C2.4 alkyl group. Non-limiting exemplary C |. loalkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, -n-propyl, -n-butyl, -n-pentyl, -n-hexyl, -n- heptyl, -n-octyl, -n-nonyl, and -n-decyl, isopropyl, , sec-butyl, tert-butyl, iso-butyl, . - iso-pentyl, -neopentyl, 1 -methylbutyl, 2-methylbutyl, 3-methylbutyl, 1 , 1 - dimethylpropyl, 1 ,2-dimethylpropyl, 1 -methylpentyl, 2-methylpentyl, 3- methylpentyl, 4-methylpentyl, 1 -ethylbutyl, 2-ethylbutyl, 3-ethylbutyl,
1 , 1 -dimethylbutyl, 1 ,2-dimethylbutyl, 1 ,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 2,3- dimethylbutyl, 3,3-dimethylbutyl, 1 -methylhexyl, 2-methylhexyl, 3-methylhexyl, 4- methylhexyl, 5-methylhexyl, 1 ,2-dimethylpentyl, 1 ,3-dimethylpentyl, 1 ,2- dimethylhexyl, 1 ,3-dimethylhexyl, 3,3-dimethylhexyl, 1 ,2-dimethylheptyl, 1 ,3- dimethylheptyl, and 3,3-dimethylheptyl.Non-limiting exemplary C I -4 alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, and iso-butyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "optionally substituted alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group means that the alkyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, or three substituents independently chosen from nitro, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, sulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, and cycloalkyl. In one embodiment, the optionally substituted alkyl is substituted with two substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted alkyl is substituted with one substituent. Non-limiting exemplary optionally substituted alkyl groups include -CH2CH2N02, -CH2CH2C02H, -CH2CH2S02CH3, -CH2CH2COPh, and -CH2C6H, , .
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "cycloalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to saturated and partially unsaturated
(containing e.g. one or two double bonds) cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbons containing one, two or three rings having from 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , or 12 carbon atoms (i. e. , C3- I 2 cycloalkyl) or the number of carbons designated. In one embodiment, the cycloalkyl group has two rings. In one embodiment, the cycloalkyl group has one ring. In another embodiment, the cycloalkyl group is chosen from a C3-8 cycloalkyl group. In another embodiment, the cycloalkyl group is chosen from a C3.6 cycloalkyl group. Non-limiting exemplary cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyi, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl,
cycloundecyl, cyclododecyl, norbornyl, decalin, adamantyl, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptenyl, cycloheptadienyl, cycloheptatrienyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclooctadienyl, cyclooctatrienyl, cyclooctatetraenyl, cyclononenyl, cyclononadienyl,
cyclononatrienyl, cyclodecenyl, cyclodecadienyl, cyclotetradecenyl, and
cyclododecadienyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "optionally substituted cycloalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group means that the cycloalkyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, or three
substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido,
alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsuifonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl,
(dialkylamino)alkyl, (cyano)alkyl, (carboxamido)alkyl, mercaptoalkyl,
(heterocyclo)alkyl, and (heteroaryl)alkyl. In one embodiment, the optionally substituted cycloalkyl is substituted with two substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted cycloalkyl is substituted with one substituent. Non- limiting
Figure imgf000026_0001
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkenyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms (C2-ioalkenyl) and including at least one, e.g. one, two or three, carbon- carbon double |[A i ]bond. In one embodiment, the alkenyl group is chosen from a C2.6 alkenyl group. In another embodiment, the alkenyl group is chosen from a C2.4 alkenyl group. Non-limiting exemplary alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, isopropenyl, butenyl, sec-butenyl, - so-butylenyl, - 1 -pentenyl, -2-pentenyl, -3- methyl-l -butenyl, -2-methyl-2-butenyl, -2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, - 1 -hexenyl, -2-hexenyl, -3-hexenyl, - 1 -heptenyl, -2-heptenyl, -3-heptenyl, -1 -octenyl, -2-octenyl, -3-octenyl, - 1 -nonenyl, -2-nonenyl, -3-nonenyl, - 1 -decenyl, -2-decenyl, -3-decenyl, and the like.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "optionally substituted alkenyl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group means the alkenyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two or three
substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido,
alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclo.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkynyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms ((C2.io)alkynyl) and including at least one, e.g. one, two or three, carbon-carbon triple bond. In one embodiment, the alkynyl has one carbon-to- carbon triple bond. In one embodiment, the alkynyl group is chosen from a C2.6 alkynyl group. In another embodiment, the alkynyl group is chosen from a C2-4 alkynyl group. Non-limiting exemplary alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, 1 - butynyl, 2-butynyl, 1 -pentynyl, 2-pentynyl, -3-methyl- l -butynyl, -4-pentynyl, - 1 - hexynyl, -2-hexynyl, -5-hexynyl, - 1 -heptynyl, -2-heptynyl, -6-heptynyl, -1 -octynyl, - 2-octynyl, -7-octynyl, - 1 -nonynyl, -2-nonynyl, -8-nonynyl, - 1 -decynyl, -2-decynyl, - 9-decynyl, and the like..
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "optionally substituted alkynyl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group means the alkynyl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one, two or three
substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido,
alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclo.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "haloalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted by one or more fluorine, chlorine, bromine and/or iodine atoms. In one embodiment, the alkyl group is substituted by one, two, or three fluorine and/or chlorine atoms. In another embodiment, the haloalkyl group is chosen from a C |.4 haloalkyl group. Non- limiting exemplary haloalkyl groups include fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromefhyl, pentafluoroethyl, 1 , 1 -difluoroethyl, 2,2-difluoroethyl, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, 3,3,3-trifluoropropyl, 4,4,4-trifluorobutyl, and trichloromethyl groups.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "monohydroxyalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group as defined above substituted with exactly one hydroxy group. Non-limiting exemplary
monohydroxyalkyl groups include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and hydroxybutyl groups. In one embodiment, the monohydroxyalkyl group is a C |.6 monohydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, the monohydroxyalkyl group is a C |.4 monohydroxyalkyl. For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "dihydroxyalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group as defined above substituted with exactly two hydroxy groups. Non-limiting exemplary
dihydroxyalkyl groups include 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl and l ,3-dihydroxyprop-2-yl. In one embodiment, the dihydroxyalkyl group is a C2-6 dihydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, the dihydroxyalkyl group is a C2-4 dihydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, the dihydroxyalkyl group is a C2 dihydroxyalkyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkoxy" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or optionally substituted alkynyl attached to a terminal oxygen atom. In one embodiment, the alkoxy group is chosen from a Ci-6 alkoxy group. In another embodiment, the alkoxy group is chosen from a C 1.4 alkyl attached to a terminal oxygen atom, e.g. , methoxy, ethoxy, and /eri-butoxy.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkylthio" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a sulfur atom substituted by an optionally substituted alkyl group. In one embodiment, the alkylthio group is chosen from a C ]. 4 alkylthio group. Non-limiting exemplary alkylthio groups include -SCH3, and -SCH2CH3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkoxyalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group. Non-limiting exemplary alkoxyalkyl groups include methoxymethyl, methoxyethyl, methoxypropyl, methoxybutyl, ethoxymethyl, ethoxyethyl, ethoxypropyl, ethoxybutyl, propoxymethyl, iso-propoxymethyl, propoxyethyl, propoxypropyl, butoxymethyl, tert-butoxymethyl, isobutoxymethyl, sec- butoxymethyl, and pentyloxymethyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "heteroalkyl" as used by itself or part of another group refers to a stable straight or branched chain
hydrocarbon radical containing 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms and at least two heteroatoms, which can be the same or different, selected from O, N, or S, wherein: 1 ) the nitrogen atom(s) and sulfur atom(s) can optionally be oxidized (to yield an N-oxide, sulfoxide or sulfone); and/or 2) the nitrogen atom(s) can optionally be quaternized. The heteroatoms can be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at a position at which the heteroalkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule. In one embodiment, the heteroalkyl group contains two oxygen atoms. Non-limiting exemplary heteroalkyl groups include -CH2OCH- 2CH2OCH3, -OCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH3, -CH2NHCH2CH2OCH2, -OCH2CH2NH2, and -NHCH2CH2N(H)CH3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "haloalkoxy" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a haloalkyl attached to a terminal oxygen atom. Non-limiting exemplary haloalkoxy groups include fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, trichloromethoxy, and 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "aryl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a monocyclic or bicyclic aromatic ring system having from six to fourteen carbon atoms (i. e. , C6- i4 aryl). Non-limiting exemplary aryl groups include phenyl (abbreviated as "Ph"), naphthyl, phenanthryl, anthracyl, indenyl, azulenyl, biphenyl, biphenylenyl, and fluorenyl groups. In one embodiment, the aryl group is chosen from phenyl or naphthyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "optionally substituted aryl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group means that the aryl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl,
arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl, (dialkylamino)alkyl,
(cyano)alkyl, (carboxamido)alkyl, mercaptoalkyl, (heterocyclo)alkyl, or
(heteroaryl)alkyl. In one embodiment, the optionally substituted aryl is an optionally substituted phenyl. In one embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has four substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has three substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has two substituents. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted phenyl has one substituent. Non-limiting exemplary substituted aryl groups include 2-methylphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 2-cyanophenyl,
3- methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3-cyanophenyl,
4- methylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 2,6-di-fluorophenyl, 2,6-di-chlorophenyl, 2-methyl, 3- methoxyphenyl, 2-ethyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 3,4-di-methoxyphenyl, 3,5-di- fluorophenyl 3,5-di-methylphenyl, 3,5-dimethoxy, 4-methylphenyl, 2-fluoro-3- chlorophenyl, 2-trifluoromethyl-4-cyanophenyl, 2-fIuoro-5-chlorophenyl, 2-fluoro-5- chlorophenyl, 2-fluoro-4-chlorophenyl, 2-cyano-3-trifluorophenyl and 3-chloro-4- fluorophenyl. The term optionally substituted aryl is meant to include groups having fused optionally substituted cycloalkyl and fused optionally substituted heterocyclo rings. Exam les include:
Figure imgf000030_0001
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "aryloxy" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an optionally substituted aryl attached to a terminal oxygen atom. A non-limiting exemplary aryloxy group is PhO-.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "aralkyloxy" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an aralkyl group attached to a terminal oxygen atom. A non-limiting exemplary aralkyloxy group is PhCH^O-.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "heteroaryl" or
"heteroaromatic" refers to monocyclic and bicyclic aromatic ring systems having 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , 12, 13, or 14 ring atoms (i.e. , C5- 14 heteroaryl) and 1 , 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms independently chosen from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur. In one embodiment, the heteroaryl has three heteroatoms. In another embodiment, the heteroaryl has two heteroatoms. In another embodiment, the heteroaryl has one heteroatom. In one embodiment, the heteroaryl is a C5 heteroaryl. In another embodiment, the heteroaryl is a C6 heteroaryl. Non-limiting exemplary heteroaryl groups include thienyl, benzo[b]thienyl, naphtho[2,3-b]thienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, benzofuryl, pyranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzooxazonyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, 2H- pyrrolyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl,
phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, cinnolinyl, quinazolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, β-carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidinyl, phenantlirolinyl, phenazinyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, phenothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In one embodiment, the heteroaryl is chosen from thienyl (e.g. , thien- 2-yl and thien-3-yl), furyl (e.g. , 2-furyl and 3-furyl), pyrrolyl (e.g. , l H-pyrrol-2-yl and l H-pyrrol-3-yl), imidazolyl (e.g. , 2H-imidazol-2-yl and 2H-imidazol-4-yl), pyrazolyl (e.g. , l H-pyrazol-3-yl, l H-pyrazol-4-yl, and l H-pyrazol-5-yl), pyridyl (e.g. , pyridin-2-yl, pyridin-3-yl, and pyridin-4-yl), pyrimidinyl (e.g. , pyrimidin-2-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl, pyrimidin-5-yl, and pyrimidin-5-yl), thiazolyl (e.g. , thiazol-2-yl, thiazol-4-yl, and thiazol-5-yl), isothiazolyl (e.g. , isothiazol-3-yl, isothiazol-4-yl, and isothiazol-5-yl), oxazolyl (e.g. , oxazol-2-yl, oxazol-4-yl, and oxazol-5-yl) and isoxazolyl (e.g. , isoxazol-3-yl, isoxazol-4-yl, and isoxazol-5-yl). The term
"heteroaryl" is also meant to include possible N-oxides. Non-limiting exemplary N- oxides include pyridyl N-oxide.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "optionally substituted heteroaryl" as used by itself or as part of another group means that the heteroaryl as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents, e.g. , one or two substituents, independently chosen from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamido, aikylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl,
(dialkylamino)alkyl, (cyano)alkyl, (carboxamido)alkyl, mercaptoalkyl, (heterocyclo)alkyl, and (heteroaryl)alkyl. In one embodiment, the optionally substituted heteroaryl has one substituent. In one embodiment, the optionally substituted is an optionally substituted pyridyl, i. e., 2-, 3-, or 4-pyridyl. Any available carbon or nitrogen atom can be substituted. In another embodiment, the optionally substituted heteroaryl is an optionally substituted indole.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "heterocyclo" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to saturated and partially unsaturated (e.g., containing one or two double bonds) cyclic groups containing 1 , 2, or 3 rings having from 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 , 12, 13, or 14 carbon atoms (i.e., C2- i 4 heterocyclo) and one or two oxygen, sulfur and/or nitrogen atoms. The term "heterocyclo" is meant to include cyclic ureido groups such as 2-imidazolidinone and cyclic amide groups such as β-lactam, γ-lactam, δ-lactam and ε-lactam. The term "heterocyclo" is also meant to include groups having fused optionally substituted aryl groups, e.g. , indolinyl. In one embodiment, the heterocyclo group is chosen from a 5- or 6- membered cyclic group containing one ring and one or two oxygen and/or nitrogen atoms. The heterocyclo can be optionally linked to the rest of the molecule through a carbon or nitrogen atom. In one embodiment the "heterocyclo" is a 3- to 8- membered heterocyclo. Non-limiting exemplary heterocyclo, i.e. 3- to 8-membered heterocyclo, groups include 2-imidazolidinone, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, and indolinyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "optionally substituted heterocyclo" as used herein by itself or part of another group means the heterocyclo as defined above is either unsubstituted or substituted with one to four substituents independently selected from halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, haloalkyl, monohydroxyalkyl, dihydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, alkylthio, carboxamido, sulfonamide, alkylcarbonyl,
arylcarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, ureido, guanidino, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkoxyalkyl, (amino)alkyl, hydroxyalkylamino, (alkylamino)alkyl, (dialkylamino)alkyl,
(cyano)alkyl, (carboxamido)alkyl, mercaptoalkyl, (heterocyclo)alkyl, and (heteroaryl)alkyl. Substitution may occur on any available carbon or nitrogen atom. Non-limiting exemplary optionally substituted heterocycio groups include:
Figure imgf000033_0001
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "amino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NH2.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkylamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NHR13, wherein R13 is alkyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "dialkylamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NR1 aR1 b, wherein R14a and Rl 4b are each independently alkyl or Rl 4a and R, 4b are taken together to form a 3- to 8-membered optionally substituted heterocycio.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "hydroxyalkylamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NHR1 5, wherein R1 5 is monohydroxyalkyl or dihydroxyalkyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "arylamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NRl 6aR16b, wherein Rl 6a is optionally substituted aryl and Rl 6b is hydrogen or alkyl. For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "cycloalkylamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NRl 7aRl 7b, wherein Rl 7a is optionally substituted cycloalkyl and Rl 7b is hydrogen or alkyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "heteroarylamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NR18aRl 8b wherein Rl 8a is optionally substituted heteroaryl and Rl 8b is hydrogen or alkyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "heterocycloamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -NRl 9aR19b wherein R19a is optionally substituted heterocyclo and R19b is hydrogen or alkyl.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(amino)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with an amino group. Non-limiting exemplary amino alkyl groups include -CH2CH2NH2,
-CH2CH2CH2NH2, and -CH2CH2CH2CH2NH2.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "diaminoalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers an alkyl group substituted with two amino groups. A non-limiting exemplary diaminoalkyl includes
-CH2CH(NH2)CH2CH2NH2.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(alkylamino)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkylamino group. A non-limiting exemplary (alkylamino)alkyl group is
-CH2CH2N(H)CH3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(dialkylamino)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted by a dialkylamino group. A non-limiting exemplary (dialkylamino)alkyl group is -CH2CH2N(CH3)2.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(cyano)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more cyano, e.g., -CN, groups. Non-limiting exemplary (cyano)alkyl groups include -CH2CH2CN, -CH2CH2CH2CN, and -CH2CH2CH2CH2CN. For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "carboxamido" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of formula -C(=O)NR20aR20b, wherein R20a and R20b are each independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R20a and R20b taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached from a 3- to 8-membered heterocyclo group. In one embodiment, R20a and R20b are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl. Non-limiting exemplary carboxamido groups include -CONH2, -CON(H)CH3, CON(CH3)2, and CON(H)Ph.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(carboxamido)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with a carboxamido group. Non-limiting exemplary (carboxamido)alkyl groups include -CH2CONH2, -C(H)CH3-CONH2, and -CH2CON(H)CH3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "sulfonamido" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -S02NR2 l aR2 l b, wherein R2 l a and R2l b are each independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl, or R2 l a and R21b taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached from a 3- to 8-membered heterocyclo group.
Non-limiting exemplary sulfonamido groups include -S02NH2, -S02N(H)CH3, and - S02N(H)Ph.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkylcarbonyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a carbonyl group, i.e. , -C(=0)-, substituted by an alkyl group. A non-limiting exemplary alkylcarbonyl group is -COCH3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "arylcarbonyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a carbonyl group, i.e. , -C(=0)-, substituted by an optionally substituted aryl group. A non-limiting exemplary arylcarbonyl group is -COPh.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkylsulfonyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a sulfonyl group, i. e. , -S02-, substituted by any of the above-mentioned optionally substituted alkyl groups. A non-limiting exemplary alkylsulfonyl group is -S02CH3. For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "arylsulfonyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a sulfonyl group, i.e. , -SO2-, substituted by any of the above-mentioned optionally substituted aryl groups. A non-limiting exemplary arylsulfonyl group is -S02Ph.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "mercaptoalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to any of the above-mentioned alkyl groups substituted by a -SH group.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "carboxy" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -COOH.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "halo" or "halogen" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to -F, -CI, Br, or -I.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "nitro" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -N02.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "cyano" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -CN.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "hydroxy" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -OH.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the tenn "carboxyalkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to any of the above-mentioned alkyl groups substituted with a -COOH. Non-limiting exemplary carboxyalkyl groups include -CH2CO2H and -CH(CH3)-C02H.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkoxycarbonyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a carbonyl group, i.e. , -C(=0)-, substituted by an alkoxy group. Non-limiting exemplary alkoxycarbonyl groups are -C02Me and -C02Et.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl group. Non-limiting exemplary (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl groups include -CH2C02CH3 and -C(H)CH3-C02CH3. For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "aralkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with one, two, or three optionally substituted aryl groups. In one embodiment, the aralkyl group is a C 1 .4 alkyl substituted with one optionally substituted aryl group. Non-limiting exemplary aralkyl groups include benzyl, phenethyl, -CHPh2, and -CH(4-F-Ph)2.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "ureido" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -NR22a-C(=0)- NR22bR22c, wherein R22a is hydrogen, alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl, and R22b and R 2c are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl, or R22b and R2 c taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclo group. Non-limiting exemplary ureido groups include - NH-C(C=0)-NH2 and -NH-C(C=0)-NHCH3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "guanidino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula
-NR a-C(=NR24)-NR23bR23c, wherein R 3a, R23b, and R23c are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl, and R24 is hydrogen, alkyl, cyano, alkylsulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, carboxamido, or sulfonamido. Non-limiting exemplary guanidino groups include -NH-C(C=NH)-NH2, -NH-C(C=NCN)-NH2, - NH-C(C=NH)-NHCH3.
For the puipose of the present disclosure, the term "azido" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to a radical of the formula -N3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(heterocyclo)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with one, two, or three optionally substituted heterocyclo groups. In one embodiment, the (heterocyclo)alkyl is a C 1 .4 alkyl substituted with one optionally substituted heterocyclo group. Non-limiting exemplary (heterocyclo)alkyl groups include:
Figure imgf000037_0001
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "(heteroaryl)alkyl" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkyl group substituted with one, two, or three optionally substituted heteroaryl groups. In one embodiment, the (heteroaryl)alkyl group is a C|.4 alkyl substituted with one optionally substituted heteroaryl grou -limiting exemplary (heteroaryl)alkyl groups include:
Figure imgf000038_0001
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkylcarbonylamino" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to an alkylcarbonyl group attached to an amino. A non-limiting exemplary alkylcarbonylamino group is -NHCOCH3.
For the purpose of the present disclosure, the term "alkylcarbonyloxy" as used by itself or as part of another group refers to oxygen substituted by one of the above-mentioned alkylcarbonyl groups. A non-limiting exemplary alkylcarbonyloxy group is -OCOCH3.
The present disclosure encompasses prodrugs of any of the disclosed compounds. As used herein, prodrugs are considered to be any covalently bonded carriers that release the active parent drug in vivo. In general, such prodrugs will be functional derivatives of Compounds of the Invention which will be readily convertible in vivo, e.g., by being metabolized, into the required Compound of the Invention. Conventional procedures for the selection and preparation of suitable prodrug derivatives are described in, for example, Design of Prodrugs, H. Bundgaard ed., Elsevier ( 1985); "Drug and Enzyme Targeting, Part A," K. Widder et al. eds., Vol. 1 12 in Methods in Enzymology, Academic Press ( 1985); Bundgaard, "Design and Application of Prodrugs," Chapter 5 (pp. 1 13- 191 ) in A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, P. rogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard eds., Harwood Academic Publishers ( 1991 ); Bundgaard et al., Adv. Drug Delivery Revs. 8: 1 -38 (1992); Bundgaard et al., J. Pharmaceut. Sci. 77:285 (1988); and akeya et al„ Chem. Pharm. Bull. 32:692 (1984). Non-limiting examples of prodrugs include esters or amides of Compounds of the Invention having hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl as a substituent, and these can be prepared by reacting such parent compounds with anhydrides such as succinic anhydride.
The present disclosure encompasses any of the Compounds of the Invention being isotopically-labelled {i.e. , radiolabeled) by having one or more atoms replaced by an atom having a different atomic mass or mass number. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into the disclosed compounds include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 1 'C, l 3C, l4C, l 5N, , 80, l 70, 3 ,P, 32P, 35S, l 8F, and 36C1, respectively, e.g. , 3H, "C, and , 4C. Isotopically-labeled Compounds of the Invention can be prepared by methods known in the art.
The present disclosure encompasses 3H, "C, or l4C radiolabeled Compounds of the Invention and the use of any such compounds as radioligands for their ability to bind to the sodium channel. For example, one use of the labeled compounds of the present disclosure is the characterization of specific receptor binding. Another use of a labeled Compound of the Invention is an alternative to animal testing for the evaluation of structure-activity relationships. For example, the receptor assay can be performed at a fixed concentration of a labeled Compound of the Invention and at increasing concentrations of a test compound in a competition assay. For example, a tritiated Compound of the Invention can be prepared by introducing tritium into the particular compound, for example, by catalytic dehalogenation with tritium. This method may include reacting a suitably halogen-substituted precursor of the compound with tritium gas in the presence of a suitable catalyst, for example, Pd/C, in the presence or absence of a base. Other suitable methods for preparing tritiated compounds can be found in Filer, Isotopes in the Physical and Biomedical Sciences, Vol. 1 , Labeled Compounds (Part A), Chapter 6 (1987). , C-labeled compounds can be prepared by employing starting materials having a I4C carbon. Some of the Compounds of the Invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and may thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms. The present disclosure is meant to encompass the use of all such possible forms, as well as their racemic and resolved forms and mixtures thereof. The individual enantiomers can be separated according to methods known in the art in view of the present disclosure. When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that they include both E and Z geometric isomers. All tautomers are intended to be encompassed by the present disclosure as well.
As used herein, the term "stereoisomers" is a general term for all isomers of individual molecules that differ only in the orientation of their atoms in space. It includes enantiomers and isomers of compounds with more than one chiral center that are not mirror images of one another (diastereomers).
The term "chiral center" refers to a carbon atom to which four different groups are attached.
The terms "enantiomer" and "enantiomeric"Tefer to a molecule that cannot be superimposed on its mirror image and hence is optically active wherein the enantiomer rotates the plane of polarized light in one direction and its mirror image compound rotates the plane of polarized light in the opposite direction.
The term "racemic" refers to a mixture of equal parts of enantiomers and which mixture is optically inactive.
The term "resolution" refers to the separation or concentration or depletion of one of the two enantiomeric forms of a molecule.
The terms "a" and "an" refer to one or more.
The term "treat," "treating" or "treatment" is meant to encompass
administering to a subject a compound of the present disclosure for the purposes of amelioration or cure, including preemptive and palliative treatment.
The term "about," as used herein in connection with a measured quantity, refers to the normal variations in that measured quantity, as expected by the skilled artisan making the measurement and exercising a level of care commensurate with the objective of measurement and the precision of the measuring equipment.
The present disclosure encompasses the preparation and use of salts of the Compounds of the Invention, including non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts include inorganic and organic acid addition salts and basic salts. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, metal salts such as sodium salt, potassium salt, cesium salt and the like; alkaline earth metals such as calcium salt, magnesium salt and the like; organic amine salts such as triethylamine salt, pyridine salt, picoline salt, ethanolamine salt, triethanolamine salt, dicyclohexylamine salt, Ν,Ν'- dibenzylethylenediamine salt and the like; inorganic acid salts such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, phosphate, sulphate and the like; organic acid salts such as citrate, lactate, tartrate, maleate, fumarate, mandelate, acetate, dichloroacetate,
trifluoroacetate, oxalate, formate and the like; sulfonates such as methanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate and the like; and amino acid salts such as arginate, asparginate, glutamate and the like.
Acid addition salts can be formed by mixing a solution of the particular Compound of the Invention with a solution of a pharmaceutically acceptable nontoxic acid such as hydrochloric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, acetic acid, citric acid, tartaric acid, carbonic acid, phosphoric acid, oxalic acid,
dichloroacetic acid, or the like. Basic salts can be formed by mixing a solution of the compound of the present disclosure with a solution of a pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, choline hydroxide, sodium carbonate and the like.
The present disclosure encompasses the preparation and use of solvates of
Compounds of the Invention. Solvates typically do not significantly alter the physiological activity or toxicity of the compounds, and as such may function as pharmacological equivalents. The term "solvate" as used herein is a combination, physical association and/or solvation of a compound of the present disclosure with a solvent molecule such as, e.g. a disolvate, monosolvate or hemisolvate, where the ratio of solvent molecule to compound of the present disclosure is 2: 1 , 1 : 1 or 1 :2, respectively. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances, the solvate can be isolated, such as when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated into the crystal lattice of a crystalline solid. Thus, "solvate" encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Compounds of the Invention can be present as solvated forms with a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent, such as water, methanol, ethanol, and the like, and it is intended that the disclosure includes both solvated and unsolvated forms of Compounds of the Invention. One type of solvate is a hydrate. A "hydrate" relates to a particular subgroup of solvates where the solvent molecule is water. Solvates typically can function as pharmacological equivalents. Preparation of solvates is known in the art. See, for example, M. Caira et al, J. Pharmaceut. Sci., 93(3):601 -61 1 (2004), which describes the preparation of solvates of fluconazole with ethyl acetate and with water. Similar preparation of solvates, hemisolvates, hydrates, and the like are described by E.C. van Tonder et al., AAPS Pharm. Sci. Tech., 5( 1 ): Article 12 (2004), and A.L. Bingham et al., Chem. Commun. 603-604 (2001 ). A typical, non-limiting, process of preparing a solvate would involve dissolving a Compound of the Invention in a desired solvent (organic, water, or a mixture thereof) at temperatures above 20°C to about 25°C, then cooling the solution at a rate sufficient to form crystals, and isolating the crystals by known methods, e.g. , filtration. Analytical techniques such as infrared spectroscopy can be used to confirm the presence of the solvent in a crystal of the solvate.
Since Compounds of the Invention are blockers of sodium (Na+) channels, a number of diseases and conditions mediated by sodium ion influx can be treated by employing these compounds. The present disclosure is thus directed generally to a method for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels in an animal suffering from, or at risk of suffering from, said disorder, said method comprising administering to the animal an effective amount of one or more
Compounds of the Invention. The present disclosure is further directed to a method of modulating sodium channels in an animal in need thereof, said method comprising administering to the animal a modulating-effective amount of at least one Compound of the Invention.
More specifically, the present disclosure provides a method of treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, pain (e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain), a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or Parkinson's disease), migraine, manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia. In one embodiment, the disclosure provides a method of treating pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is chronic pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is neuropathic pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is postoperative pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is inflammatory pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is surgical pain. In another embodiment, the type of pain is acute pain. In another embodiment, the treatment of pain (e.g. , chronic pain, such as neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, or inflammatory pain, acute pain or surgical pain) is preemptive. In another embodiment, the treatment of pain is palliative. In each instance, such method of treatment requires administering to an animal in need of such treatment an amount of a Compound of the Invention that is therapeutically effective in achieving said treatment. In one embodiment, the amount of such compound is the amount that is effective to block sodium channels in vitro. In one embodiment, the amount of such compound is the amount that is effective to block sodium channels in vivo.
Chronic pain includes, but is not limited to, inflammatory pain, postoperative pain, cancer pain, osteoarthritis pain associated with metastatic cancer, trigeminal neuralgia, acute herpetic and postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, causalgia, brachial plexus avulsion, occipital neuralgia, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, fibromyalgia, gout, phantom limb pain, burn pain, and other forms of neuralgia, neuropathic, and idiopathic pain syndromes. Chronic somatic pain generally results from inflammatory responses to tissue injury such as nerve entrapment, surgical procedures, cancer or arthritis (Brower, Nature Biotechnology 75:387-391 (2000)).
The inflammatory process is a complex series of biochemical and cellular events activated in response to tissue injury or the presence of foreign substances (Levine, Inflammatory Pain, In: Textbook of Pain, Wall and Melzack eds., 3rd ed., 1994). Inflammation often occurs at the site of injured tissue, or foreign material, and contributes to the process of tissue repair and healing. The cardinal signs of inflammation include erythema (redness), heat, edema (swelling), pain and loss of function (ibid.). The majority of patients with inflammatory pain do not experience pain continually, but rather experience enhanced pain when the inflamed site is moved or touched. Inflammatory pain includes, but is not limited to, that associated with osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis.
Chronic neuropathic pain is a heterogeneous disease state with an unclear etiology. In chronic neuropathic pain, the pain can be mediated by multiple mechanisms. This type of pain generally arises from injury to the peripheral or central nervous tissue. The syndromes include pain associated with spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis, post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia, phantom pain, causalgia, and reflex sympathetic dystrophy and lower back pain. Chronic pain is different from acute pain in that patients suffer the abnormal pain sensations that can be described as spontaneous pain, continuous superficial burning and/or deep aching pain. The pain can be evoked by heat-, cold-, and mechano-hyperalgesia or by heat-, cold-, or mechano-allodynia.
Neuropathic pain can be caused by injury or infection of peripheral sensory nerves. It includes, but is not limited to, pain from peripheral nerve trauma, herpes virus infection, diabetes mellitus, causalgia, plexus avulsion, neuroma, limb amputation, and vasculitis. Neuropathic pain is also caused by nerve damage from chronic alcoholism, human immunodeficiency virus infection, hypothyroidism, uremia, or vitamin deficiencies. Stroke (spinal or brain) and spinal cord injury can also induce neuropathic pain. Cancer-related neuropathic pain results from tumor growth compression of adjacent nerves, brain, or spinal cord. In addition, cancer treatments, including chemotherapy and radiation therapy, can also cause nerve injury. Neuropathic pain includes but is not limited to pain caused by nerve injury such as, for example, the pain from which diabetics suffer.
The present disclosure is also directed to the use of a Compound of the Invention in the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels (e.g. , any of the disorders listed above) in an animal suffering from said disorder.
General Synthesis of Compounds
Compounds of the Invention can be prepared using methods known to those skilled in the art in view of this disclosure. For example, compounds having
Formula I wherein R4 is 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl can be prepared according to General Scheme 1 .
General Scheme 1
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000046_0002
Formula I
(wherein R4 is 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)
Briefly, dichloropyrimide A is made to react with dioxaborolane B to give compound C. The carboxylic acid group of compound C is esterified to give compound D, and compound D is made to react with dioxaborolane E to give compound F. The alkenyl group of compound F is dihydroxylated, for example using AD-Mix-a or AD-Mix-β, to give compound G (or the R- or S-isomer thereof). Compound G is made to react with amine H R ' R2 using standard coupling methods and reagents to give a compound having Formula I wherein R4 is 1 ,2- dihydroxyethyl. One skilled in the art will recognize that initially reacting dioxaborolane E with compound A instead of dioxaborolane B will provide a different pyrimidine regioisomer of Formula I. Testing of Compounds
Representative Compounds of the Invention were assessed by sodium mobilization and/or electrophysiological assays for sodium channel blocker activity. One aspect of the present disclosure is based on the use of the Compounds of the Invention as sodium channel blockers. Based upon this property, Compounds of the Invention are considered useful in treating a condition or disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium ion channels, e.g., stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, general epilepsy with febrile seizures, severe myoclonic epilepsy in infancy, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, migraine, familial primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, dystonia, tremor, mental retardation, autism, a neurodegenerative disorder (e.g. , Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or
Parkinson's disease), manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia. Compounds of the Invention are also expected to be effective in treating pain, e.g. , acute pain, chronic pain, which includes but is not limited to, neuropathic pain, postoperative pain, and inflammatory pain, or surgical pain.
More specifically, the present disclosure is directed to Compounds of the Invention that are blockers of sodium channels. According to the present disclosure, those compounds having useful sodium channel blocking properties exhibit an IC50 for Nav l . l , Nav1.2, Nav1.3, Nav 1.4, Nav1.5, Nav1.6, Nav1.7, Nav1.8, and/or Nav 1.9 of about 100 μΜ or less, e.g. , about 50 μΜ or less, about 25 μΜ or less, about 10 μΜ or less, about 5 μΜ or less, or about 1 μΜ or less, in sodium mobilization and/or electrophysiological assays. In certain embodiments, Compounds of the Invention exhibit an IC50 for Nav1.7 of 100 μΜ or less, about 50 μΜ or less, about 25 μΜ or less, about 10 μΜ or less, about 5 μΜ or less, about 1 μΜ or less, about 0.5 μΜ or less, about 0.1 μΜ or less, about 0.05 μΜ or less, or about 0.01 μΜ or less.
Compounds of the Invention can be tested for their Na+ channel blocking activity using methods known in the art and by the following fluorescence imaging and electrophysiological in vitro assays and/or in vivo assays. In one embodiment, Compounds of the Invention demonstrate substantially no penetration across the CNS blood-brain barrier in a mammal. Such compounds are referred to as "peripherally restricted" as a means to designate their PNS versus CNS tissue selectivity.
In one embodiment, the PNS:CNS concentration ratio of a peripherally restricted Compound of the Invention is about 5: 1 , about 10: 1 , about 20: 1 , about 30: 1 ; about 50: 1 ; about 100: 1 , about 250: 1 , about 500: 1 , about 1000: 1 , about 5,000: 1 , about 10,000: 1 , or more. Compounds of the Invention can be tested for their ability to penetrate the central nervous system using in vitro and in vivo methods known in the art.
In Vitro Assay Protocols
FLIPR® Assays
Recombinant Nav 1.7 Cell Line: In vitro assays were performed in a recombinant cell line expressing cDNA encoding the alpha subunit (Nav l .7, SCN9a, PN 1 , NE) of human Nav 1.7 (Accession No. NM_002977). The cell line was provided by investigators at Yale University (Cummins et al, J. Neurosci. 18(23): 9607-961 ( 1998)). For dominant selection of the Nav 1 .7-expressing clones, the expression plasmid co-expressed the neomycin resistance gene. The cell line was constructed in the human embryonic kidney cell line, HEK293, under the influence of the CMV major late promoter, and stable clones were selected using limiting dilution cloning and antibiotic selection using the neomycin analogue, G41 8.
Recombinant beta and gamma subunits were not introduced into this cell line.
Additional cell lines expressing recombinant Nav 1 .7 cloned from other species can also be used, alone or in combination with various beta subunits, gamma subunits or chaperones.
Non-recombinant Cell Lines Expressing Native Nav l .7: Alternatively, in vitro assays can be performed in a cell line expressing native, non-recombinant Nav l .7, such as the ND7 mouse neuroblastoma X rat dorsal root ganglion (DRG) hybrid cell line ND7/23, available from the European Cell Culture Collection (Cat. No. 92090903, Salisbury, Wiltshire, United Kingdom). The assays can also be performed in other cell lines expressing native, non-recombinant Nav 1.7, from various species, or in cultures of fresh or preserved sensory neurons, such as dorsal root ganglion (DRG) cells, isolated from various species. Primary screens or counter-screens of other voltage-gated sodium channels can also be performed, and the cell lines can be constructed using methods known in the art, purchased from collaborators or commercial establishments, and they can express either recombinant or native channels. The primary counter-screen is for one of the central neuronal sodium channels, Navl .2 (rBIIa), expressed in HEK293 host cells (Ilyin et al., Br. J. Pharmacol. 144:801 -812 (2005)). Pharmacological profiling for these counter- screens is carried out under conditions similar to the primary or alternative Nav l .7 assays described below.
Cell maintenance: Unless otherwise noted, cell culture reagents were purchased from Mediatech of Herndon, VA. The recombinant Nav1.7/HEK293 cells were routinely cultured in growth medium consisting of Dulbecco's minimum essential medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS, Hyclone, Thermo Fisher Scientific, Logan, UT), 100 U/mL penicillin, 100 g/mL streptomycin, 2-4 n M L- glutamine, and 500 mg/mL G418. For natural, non-recombinant cell lines, the selective antibiotic was omitted, and additional media formulations can be applied as needed.
Assay Buffer: The assay buffer was formulated by removing 120 mL from a 1 L bottle of fresh, sterile dH20 (Mediatech, Herndon, VA) and adding 100 mL of 10X HBSS that does not contain Ca++ or Mg++ (Gibco, Invitrogen, Grand Island, NY) followed by 20 mL of 1.0 M Hepes, pH 7.3 (Fisher Scientific, BP299- 100). The final buffer consisted of 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3, 1.261 mM CaCl2, 0.493 mM MgCl2, 0.407 mM Mg(SO)4, 5.33 mM KC1, 0.441 mM KH2P04, 137 mM NaCl, 0.336 mM Na2HP04 and 0.556 mM D-glucose (Hanks et al., Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 71 : 196 (1949)), and the simple formulation was typically the basic buffer throughout the assay (i.e., all wash and addition steps). CoroNa Green AM Na Dye for Primary Fluorescence Assay: The fluorescence indicator used in the primary fluorescence assay was the cell permeant version of CoroNa™ Green (Invitrogen, Molecular Probes, Eugene, OR), a dye that emits light in the fluorescence range (Harootunian et al., J. Biol. Chem.
264(32): 19458- 19467 (1989)). The intensity of this emission, but not the wavelength range, is increased when the dye is exposed to Na+ ions, which it can bind with partial selectivity. Cells expressing Nav1.7 or other sodium channels were loaded with the CoroNa™ Green dye immediately in advance of the fluorescence assay, and then, after agonist stimulation, the mobilization of Na+ ions was detected as the Na+ ions flowed from the extracellular fluid into the cytoplasm through the activated sodium channel pores. The dye was stored in the dark as a lyophilized powder, and then an aliquot was dissolved immediately before the cell loading procedure, according to the instructions of the manufacturer to a stock concentration of 1 0 mM in DMSO. It was then diluted in the assay buffer to a 4X concentrated working solution, so that the final concentration of dye in the cell loading buffer was 5 μΜ.
Membrane Potential Dye for Alternative Fluorescence Assays: A
fluorescence indicator that can be used in alternative fluorescence assays is the blue version membrane potential dye (MDS, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA), a dye that detects changes in molecules following a change in membrane potential. An increase in fluorescence is expected if agonist stimulation provokes a change in membrane potential. Cells expressing Nav l .7 or other sodium channels are incubated with the membrane potential dye 30-60 minutes before the fluorescence assay. In the case of the C1 pre-stimulation version of the assay, the dye and all other
components are washed out immediately before the assay, and the dye is then replaced. In the version lacking KC1 pre-stimulation, the dye remains on the cells and is not washed out or replaced. The dye is stored in the dark as a lyophilized powder, and then an aliquot dissolved in assay buffer to form a 20X-concentrated stock solution that can be used for several weeks.
Agonists: In the fluorescence assays, two agonists were used in combination, namely 1 ) veratridine; and 2) the venom from the yellow scorpion, Leiurus quinquestriatus hebraeus. Veratridine is an alkaloid small molecule that facilitates the capture of channel openings by inhibiting inactivation, and the scorpion venom is a natural preparation that includes peptide toxins selective for different subsets of voltage-gated sodium channels. These scorpion toxins inhibit the fast inactivation of their cognate target channels. Stock solutions of the agonists were prepared to 40 mM in DMSO (veratridine) and 1 mg/mL in dH20 (scorpion venom), and then diluted to make a 4X or 2X stock (depending on the particular assay) in assay buffer, the final concentration being 100 μΜ (veratridine) and 10 ^ig/mL (scorpion venom). Both of the agonists were purchased from Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, MO.
Test Compounds: Test compounds were dissolved in DMSO to yield 10 mM stock solutions. The stock solutions were further diluted using DMSO in 1 :3 serial dilution steps with 10 points (10,000 μΜ, 3.333 μΜ, 1.1 1 1 μΜ, 370 μΜ, 123 μΜ, 41 μΜ, 14 μΜ, 4.6 μΜ, 1.5 μΜ and 0.5 μΜ). The stock solutions were further diluted in assay buffer ( 1 : 125) as 4X stock serial dilutions with a DMSO
concentration of 0.8% (final [DMSO], in the assay, from the compounds component = 0.2%), so that the compounds' final concentrations in the assay were 20 μΜ, 6.7 μΜ, 2.2 μΜ, 0.74 μΜ, 0.25 μΜ and 0.08 μΜ, 0.03 μΜ, 0.01 μΜ, 0.003 μΜ and 0.001 μΜ. If a particular test article appeared to be especially potent, then the concentration curve was adjusted, e.g., to 10-fold lower concentrations, in order to perform the dose-response in a more relevant concentration range. Compound dilutions were added during the dye-loading and pre-stimulation step, and then again during the fluorescence assay, early in the kinetic read. Compound dilutions were added in duplicate rows across the middle 80 wells of the 96-well plate, whereas the fully stimulated and the fully inhibited controls (positive and negative) were located in the top 4 side wells and the bottom 4 side wells, respectively, on the left and right sides of the assay plate.
Data Analysis: The data were analyzed according to methods known to those skilled in the art or using the GraphPad® Prism version 4.0 or higher, Program (available from GraphPad Software, San Diego, CA) to determine the IC50 value for the test article. At least one standard reference compound was evaluated during each experiment.
FLIPR® or FLIPRTETRA® sodium dye assay with KCl and test article preincubation: Cells were prepared by plating the recombinant HEK293 cells or other host cells expressing either recombinant or non-recombinant, native, Nay l .7 alpha subunit, alone or in combination with various beta and gamma subunits at a density of -40,000 cells/well into a 96-well black, clear-bottom, PDL-coated plate. The assay can be adapted to 384-well or 1 ,536-well format, if desired, using
proportionately less cells and media. The plate was then incubated in growth media, with or without selective antibiotic, overnight at 37°C at 5% CO2, 95% humidity, in preparation for the assay. For counter-screens of other voltage-gated sodium channels, the procedure was very similar, though optimal densities of cells, media and subsequent assay components can be fine-tuned for the particular cell line or isoform.
The next day, at the start of the assay, the media was flicked from the cells and the wells were washed once with 50 μΐ/well assay buffer ( I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3) and then pre-incubated with the test articles, CoroNa™ Green AM sodium dye (for cell loading) and KCl for re-polarization and synchronization of the channels in the entire population of cells. For this dye-loading and pre-stimulation step, the components were added as follows, immediately after the wash step: 1 ) first, the compound dilutions and controls were added as 4X concentrates in assay buffer at 50 ^iL/well; 2) CoroNa™ Green AM dye was diluted from the stock solution to 20 μΜ in assay buffer (4X concentrate) and added to the plate at 50 nL/well; and 3) finally, a solution of 180 mM KCl (2X) was prepared by diluting a 2M stock solution into assay buffer and the solution was added to the cells at 100 μΐ/well. The cells were incubated at 25°C in the dark for 30 min. before their fluorescence was measured.
The plates containing dye-loaded cells were then flicked to remove the preincubation components and washed once with 100 μΙ ΛνεΙΙ assay buffer. A 100 μΙΙΛνεΙΙ aliquot of assay buffer was added back to the plate, and the real-time assay was commenced. The fluorescence of cells was measured using a fluorescence plate reader (FLIPRTETRA® or FLIPR384®, MDS, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA) Samples were excited by either a laser or a PMT light source (Excitation wavelength = 470-495 nM) and the emissions were filtered (Emission wavelength = 5 1 5-575 nM). The additions of compound and the channel activators in this cell-based, medium-to-high throughput assay were performed on the fluorescence plate reader and the results (expressed as relative fluorescence units) were captured by means of camera shots every 1 -3 sec, then displayed in real-time and stored. Generally, there was a 15 sec. base line, with camera shots taken every 1 .5 sec, then the test compounds were added, then another 120 sec. baseline was conducted, with camera shots taken every 3 se ; and finally, the agonist solution (containing veratridine and scorpion venom) was added. The amplitude of fluorescence increase, resulting from the binding of Na+ ions to the CoroNa™ Green dye, was captured for -180 sec. thereafter. Results were expressed in relative fluorescence units (RFU) and can be determined by using the maximum signal during the latter part of the stimulation; or the maximum minus the minimum during the whole agonist stimulation period; or by taking the area under the curve for the whole stimulation period.
The assay was performed as a screening assay as well with the test articles present in standard amounts (e.g., 10 μΜ) in only one or two wells of a multi-well plate during the primary screen. Hits in this screen were typically profiled more exhaustively (multiple times), subjected to dose-response or competition assays and tested in counter screens against other voltage-gate sodium channels or other biologically relevant target molecules.
FLIPR® or FLIPRTETRA® membrane potential assay with KC1 and test article pre-incubation: Cells are prepared by plating the recombinant HEK293 cells or other host cells expressing either recombinant or non-recombinant, native, Nav l .7 alpha subunit, alone or in combination with various beta and gamma subunits at a density of -40,000 cells/well into a 96-well black, clear-bottom, PDL-coated plate. The assay can be adapted to 384-well or 1 ,536-well format, if desired, using
proportionately less cells and media. The plate is then incubated in growth media, with or without selective antibiotic, overnight at 37°C at 5% C02, 95% humidity, in preparation for the assay (see, e.g., Benjamin et. al., J. Biomol. Screen 10(4):365-373 (2005)). For screens and counter-screens of other voltage-gated sodium channels, the assay protocol is similar, though optimal densities of cells, media and subsequent assay components can be fine-tuned for the particular cell line or sodium channel isoform being tested.
The next day, at the start of the assay, the media is flicked from the cells and the wells are washed once with 50 μίΛνεΙΙ assay buffer ( I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3) and then pre-incubated with the test articles, the membrane potential dye (for cell loading), and the KC1 for re-polarization and synchronization of the channels in the entire population of cells. For this dye-loading and pre-stimulation step, the components are added as follows, immediately after the wash step: 1 ) first, the compound dilutions and controls are added as 4X concentrates in assay buffer at 50 μίΛνεΙΙ; 2) membrane potential dye is diluted from the stock solution in assay buffer (4X concentrate) and added to the plate at 50 μΙ,ΛνεΠ; and 3) finally, a solution of 1 80 mM KG (2X) is prepared by diluting a 2M stock solution into assay buffer and the solution added to the cells at 100 μΐ ννεΐΐ. The cells are incubated at 37°C in the dark for 30-60 min. before their fluorescence is measured.
The plates containing dye-loaded cells are then flicked to remove the preincubation components and washed once with 50 μίΛνεΙΙ assay buffer. A 50 μί,ΛνεΙΙ aliquot of membrane potential dye is added back to the plate, and the realtime assay is commenced. The fluorescence of cells is measured using a
fluorescence plate reader (FLIPRTETRA® or FLIPR384®, MDS, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA). Samples are excited by either a laser or a PMT light source (Excitation wavelength = 510-545 nM) and the emissions are filtered (Emission wavelength = 565-625 nM). The additions of the compounds (first) and then the channel activators (later) in this are performed on the fluorescence plate reader and the results, expressed as relative fluorescence units (RFU), are captured by means of camera shots every 1 -3 sec, then displayed in real-time and stored. Generally, there is a 15 sec. base line, with camera shots taken every 1 .5 sec, then the test compounds are added, then another 120 sec. baseline is conducted, with camera shots taken every 3 sec; and finally, the agonist solution (containing veratridine and scorpion venom) is added. The amplitude of fluorescence increase, resulting from the detection of membrane potential change, is captured for -120 sec. thereafter. Results are expressed in relative fluorescence units (RFU) and can be determined by using the maximum signal during the latter part of the stimulation; or the maximum minus the minimum during the whole stimulation period; or by taking the area under the curve for the whole stimulation period.
The assay can be performed as a screening assay as well with the test articles present in standard amounts (e.g., 10 μΜ) in only one or two wells of a multi-well plate during the primary screen. Hits in this screen are typically profiled more exhaustively (multiple times), subjected to dose-response or competition assays and tested in counter screens against other voltage-gate sodium channels or other biologically relevant target molecules.
FLIPR® or FLIPRTETRA® sodium dye assay without KC1 and test article preincubation: Cells are prepared by plating the recombinant HEK293 cells or other host cells expressing either recombinant or non-recombinant, native, Nay l .7 alpha subunit, alone or in combination with various beta and gamma subunits at a density of -40,000 cells/well into a 96-well black, clear-bottom, PDL-coated plate. The assay can be adapted to 384-well or 1 ,536-well format, if desired, using
proportionately less cells and media. The plate is then incubated in growth media, with or without selective antibiotic, overnight at 37°C at 5% C02, 95% humidity, in preparation for the assay. For counter-screens of other voltage-gated sodium channels, the procedure is very similar, though optimal densities of cells, media and subsequent assay components can be fine-tuned for the particular cell line or isoform.
The next day, at the start of the assay, the media is flicked from the cells and the wells washed once with 50 μΙ_Λνε11 assay buffer ( I X Hank's balanced salt solution without sodium bicarbonate or phenol red, 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.3).
Membrane potential dye is then added to each well of the 96-well plate (50 μίΛνεΙΙ),
I from a freshly diluted sample of the stock (now at 4X concentration) in the assay buffer. The cells are incubated at 37°C in the dark for 30-60 min. before their fluorescence is measured.
In this standard membrane potential assay, the 96-well plate containing dye- loaded cells is then loaded directly onto the plate reader without aspirating the dye solution and without any further washing of the cells. The fluorescence of cells is measured using a fluorescence plate reader (FLIPRTETRA® or FLIPR384®, MDS, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA). Samples are excited by either a laser or a PMT light source (Excitation wavelength = 5 10-545 nM) and the emissions are filtered (Emission wavelength = 565-625 nM). The additions of the compounds (first, 50 μΕ/well from a 4X stock plate) and then the channel activators (later, 100 μίΑνεΙΙ from a 2X stock solution) in this kinetic assay are performed on the fluorescence plate reader and the results, expressed as relative fluorescence units (RFU), are captured by means of camera shots every 1 -3 sec, then displayed in real-time and stored. Generally, there is a 15 sec. base line, with camera shots taken every 1.5 sec, then the test compounds are added, then another 120 sec. baseline is conducted, with camera shots taken every 3 se ; and finally, the agonist solution (containing veratridine and scorpion venom) is added. The amplitude of fluorescence increase, resulting from the detection of membrane potential change, is captured for -120 sec. thereafter. Results are expressed in relative fluorescence units (RFU) and can be determined by using the maximum signal during the latter part of the stimulation; or the maximum minus the minimum during the whole stimulation period; or by taking the area under the curve for the whole stimulation period.
The assay can be performed as a screening assay as well, with the test articles present in standard amounts (e.g. 10 μΜ) in only one or two wells of a multi-well plate during the primary screen. Hits in this screen are typically profiled more exhaustively (multiple times), subjected to dose-response or competition assays and tested in counter screens against other voltage-gate sodium channels or other biologically relevant target molecules. Electrophysiology Assay
Cells: The hNav 1.7 expressing HE -293 cells were plated on 35 mm culture dishes pre-coated with poly-D-lysine in standard DMEM culture media (Mediatech, Inc., Herndon, VA) and incubated in a 5% C02 incubator at 37°C. Cultured cells 5 were used approximately 12 - 48 hours after plating.
Electrophysiology: On the day of experimentation, the 35 mm dish was placed on the stage of an inverted microscope equipped with a perfusion system that continuously perfuses the culture dish with fresh recording media. A gravity driven superfusion system was used to apply test solutions directly to the cell under
10 evaluation, This system consists of an array of glass pipette glass connected to a motorized horizontal translator. The outlet of the shooter was positioned
approximately 100 μπι from the cell of interest.
Whole cell currents were recorded using the whole-cell patch clamp configuration using an Axopatch 200B amplifier (Axon Instruments, Foster City
15 CA), 1 322A A/D converter (Axon Instruments) and pClamp software (v. 8; Axon Instruments) and stored on a personal computer. Gigaseals were formed and the whole-cell configuration was established in voltage clamp mode, and membrane currents generated by hNav 1 .7 were recorded in gap-free mode. Borosilicate glass pipettes have resistance values between 1 .5 and 2.0 ΜΩ when filled with pipette
20 solution and series resistance (< 5 ΜΩ) was compensated 75 - 80%. Signals were sampled at 50 kHz and low pass filtered at 3 kHz.
Voltage protocols: After establishing the whole-cell configuration in voltage clamp mode, voltage protocols were run to establish the 1 ) test potential, 2) holding potential, and 3) the conditioning potential for each cell.
25 After establishing the whole-cell configuration in voltage clamp mode, a standard I-V protocol was run to determine the potential at which the maximal current (Imax) is elicited. This potential was the test potential (Vt). To determine a conditioning potential at which 100% of channels were in the inactivated state, a standard steady-state inactivation (SSIN) protocol was run using a series of fifteen 100 ms-long depolarizing prepulses, incrementing in 10 mV steps, immediately followed by a 5 ms testing pulse, Vt, to Vmax. This protocol also permitted determination of the holding potential at which all channels are in the resting state.
For compounds causing significant retardation of recovery from inactivation, an estimate of the affinity for the inactivated state of the channel (K,) was generated using the following protocol. From the negative, no residual inactivation, holding potential, the cell was depolarized to the conditioning voltage for 2-5 seconds, returned to the negative holding potential for 10 -20 ms to relieve fast inactivation and then depolarized to the test potential for -15 ms. This voltage protocol was repeated every 10- 15 seconds, first to establish a baseline in the absence of the test compound, then in the presence of the test compound.
After a stable baseline was established, the test compound was applied and block of the current elicited by the test pulse assessed. In some cases, multiple cumulative concentrations were applied to identify a concentration that blocked between 40- 60 % of this current. Washout of the compound was attempted by superfusing with control solution once steady-state block was observed. An estimate of the Ki was calculated as follows:
Ki = [drug]* {FR/( l -FR)} , Eq. 1 where [drug] is the concentration of a drug, and
FR = I(after drug)/I(control), Eq. 2 where I is the peak current amplitude. If multiple concentrations were used, K, was determined from the fit of a logistic equation to FRs plotted against corresponding drug concentrations.
In the alternative, the voltage clamp protocol to examine hNav l .7 currents was as follows. First, the standard current-voltage relationship was tested by pulsing the cell from the holding voltage (Vh) of - 120 mV by a series of 5 msec long square- shaped test pulses incrementing in +10 mV steps over the membrane voltage range of -90 mV to + 60 mV at the pace of stimulation of 0.5 Hz. This procedure determines the voltage that elicits the maximal current (Vmax). Second, Vh was re-set to - 120 mV and a steady-state inactivation (SSIN) curve was taken by the standard double-pulse protocol: 100 ms depolarizing pre-pulse was incremented in steps of +10 mV (voltage range from -90mV to 0 mV) immediately followed by the 5ms long test pulse to - 10 mV at the pace of stimulation of 0.2 Hz. This procedure determines the voltage of full inactivation (VfUn). Third, the cell was repeatedly stimulated with the following protocol, first in the absence of the test compound then in its presence. The protocol consisted of depolarizing the cell from the holding potential of - 120 mV to the Vfun value for 4.5 seconds then repolarizing the cell to the holding potential for 10 ms before applying the test pulse to the Vmax for 5 ms. The amount of inhibition produced by the test compound was determined by comparing the current amplitude elicited by the test pulse in the absence and presence of the compound.
In a further alternative, the voltage clamp protocol to examine hNav 1.7 currents was as follows. After establishing the whole-cell configuration in voltage clamp mode, two voltage protocols were run to establish: 1 ) the holding potential; and 2) the test potential for each cell.
Resting block: To determine a membrane potential at which the majority of channels are in the resting state, a standard steady-state inactivation (SSIN) protocol was run using 100 ms prepulses x 10 mV depolarizing steps. The holding potential for testing resting block (Vhi ) was 20 mV more hyperpolarized than the first potential where inactivation was observed with the inactivation protocol.
From this holding potential a standard I-V protocol was run to determine the potential at which the maximal current (Imax) is elicited. This potential was the test potential (Vt).
The compound testing protocol was a series of 10ms depolarizations from the Vhi (determined from the SSIN) to the Vt (determined from the I-V protocol) repeated every 10- 15 seconds. After a stable baseline was established, a high concentration of a test compound (highest concentration solubility permits or that which provides -50% block) was applied and block of the current assessed.
Washout of the compound was attempted by superfusing with control solution once steady-state block was observed. The fractional response was calculated as follows:
Kr = [drug]* { FR/( l -FR)} , Eq. 3 where [drug] is the concentration of a drug, and
FR = I(after drug)/I(control), Eq. 2 where I is the peak current amplitude and was used for estimating resting block dissociation constant, Kr.
Block of inactivated channels: To assess the block of inactivated channels the holding potential was depolarized such that 20-50% of the current amplitude was reduced when pulsed to the same Vt as above. The magnitude of this depolarization depends upon the initial current amplitude and the rate of current loss due to slow inactivation. This was the second holding potential (Vh2). The current reduction was recorded to determine the fraction of available channels at this potential (h).
h = I @ Vh2 / Imax. Eq. 4
At this membrane voltage a proportion of channels was in the inactivated state, and thus inhibition by a blocker includes interaction with both resting and inactivated channels.
To determine the potency of the test compound on inactivated channels, a series of currents were elicited by 10ms voltage steps from Vh2 to Vt every 10- 15 seconds. After establishing a stable baseline, the low concentration of the compound was applied. In some cases, multiple cumulative concentrations will have to be applied to identify a concentration that blocks between 40-60 % of the current. Washout is attempted to re-establish baseline. Fractional responses were measured with respect to a projected baseline to determine Kapp.
Kapp = [drug]* { FR/(l -FR)} , Eq. 5 where [drug] is the concentration of a drug.
This Kapp value, along with the calculated Kr and h values, were used to calculate the affinity of the compound for the inactivated channels (Kj) using the following equation:
Ki = ( l -h ) / (( l/ app) - (h/ r)). Eq. 6
Solutions and chemicals: For electrophysiological recordings the external solution was either standard, DMEM supplemented with 10 mM HEPES (pH adjusted to 7.34 with NaOH and the osmolarity adjusted to 320) or Tyrodes salt solution (Sigma, USA) supplemented with 10 mM HEPES (pH adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH; osmolarity = 320). The internal pipette solution contained (in mM): NaCl ( 10), CsF ( 140), CaCl2 ( 1 ), MgCI2 (5), EGTA ( 1 1 ), HEPES ( 10: pH 7.4, 305 mOsm). Compounds were prepared first as series of stock solutions in DMSO and then dissolved in external solution; DMSO content in final dilutions did not exceed 0.3%. At this concentration, DMSO did not affect sodium currents. Vehicle solution used to establish base line was also contacting 0.3% DMSO.
Data analysis: Data was analyzed off-line using Clampfit software (pClamp, v. 8; Axon Instruments) and graphed using GraphPad Prism (v. 4.0 or higher) software.
In Vivo Assay for Pain
Compounds of the Invention can be tested for their antinociceptive activity in the formalin model as described in Hunskaar et al., J. Neurosci. Methods 14: 69-76 ( 1985). Male Swiss Webster NIH mice (20-30 g; Harlan, San Diego, CA) can be used in all experiments. Food is withdrawn on the day of experiment. Mice are placed in Plexiglass jars for at least 1 hour to acclimate to the environment.
Following the acclimation period, mice are weighed and given either the compound of interest administered i.p. or p.o., or the appropriate volume of vehicle (for example, 10 % Tween-80 or 0.9 % saline, and other pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles) as control. Fifteen minutes after the i.p. dosing, and 30 minutes after the p.o. dosing mice are injected with formalin (20 μί. of 5% formaldehyde solution in saline) into the dorsal surface of the right hind paw, Mice are transferred to the Plexiglass jars and monitored for the amount of time spent licking or biting the injected paw. Periods of licking and biting are recorded in 5-minute intervals for 1 hour after the formalin injection. All experiments are done in a blinded manner during the light cycle. The early phase of the formalin response is measured as licking / biting between 0-5 minutes, and the late phase is measured from 15-50 minutes. Differences between vehicle and drug treated groups can be analyzed by one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA). A P value <0.05 is considered significant. Compounds are considered to be efficacious for treating acute and chronic pain if they have activity in blocking both the early and second phase of formalin-induced paw-licking activity.
In Vivo Assays for Inflammatory or Neuropathic Pain
Test Animals: Each experiment uses rats weighing between 200-260 g at the start of the experiment. The rats are group-housed and have free access to food and water at all times, except prior to oral administration of a test compound when food is removed for 16 h before dosing. A control group acts as a comparison to rats treated with a Compound of the Invention. The control group is administered the carrier as used for the test compound. The volume of earner administered to the control group is the same as the volume of carrier and test compound administered to the test group.
Inflammatory Pain: To assess the actions of Compounds of the Invention on the treatment of inflammatory pain the Freund's complete adjuvant ("FCA") model of inflammatory pain is used. FCA-induced inflammation of the rat hind paw is associated with the development of persistent inflammatory mechanical and thermal hyperalgesia and provides reliable prediction of the anti-hyperalgesic action of clinically useful analgesic drugs (Bartho et al., Naunyn-Schmiedeberg's Archives of Pharmacol. 342:666-670 (1990)). The left hind paw of each animal is administered a 50 intraplantar injection of 50% FCA. 24 hour post injection, the animal is assessed for response to noxious mechanical stimuli by determining the paw withdrawal threshold (PWT), or to noxious thermal stimuli by determining the paw withdrawal latency (PWL), as described below. Rats are then administered a single injection of either a test compound or 30 mg/Kg of a positive control compound (indomethacin) ), or an equal volume of vehicle as a negative control. Responses to noxious mechanical or thermal stimuli are then determined 1 , 3, 5 and 24 hours post administration (admin). Percentage reversal of hyperalgesia for each animal is defined as: [(post administration PWT or PWL)-(pre-administration PWT or PWL)]
% reversal = X 100
[(baseline PWT or PWL) - (pre-administration PWT or PWL)] Neuropathic Pain: To assess the actions of the test compounds for the treatment of neuropathic pain the Seltzer model or the Chung model can be used.
In the Seltzer model, the partial sciatic nerve ligation model of neuropathic pain is used to produce neuropathic hyperalgesia in rats (Seltzer et al., Pain 43:205- 218 (1990)). Partial ligation of the left sciatic nerve is performed under
isoflurane/02 inhalation anesthesia. Following induction of anesthesia, the left thigh of the rat is shaved and the sciatic nerve exposed at high thigh level through a small incision and is carefully cleared of surrounding connective tissues at a site near the trocanther just distal to the point at which the posterior biceps semitendinosus nerve branches off of the common sciatic nerve. A 7-0 silk suture is inserted into the nerve with a 3/8 curved, reversed-cutting mini-needle and tightly ligated so that the dorsal V3 to ½ of the nerve thickness is held within the ligature. The wound is closed with a single muscle suture (4-0 nylon (Vicryl)) and vetbond tissue glue. Following surgery, the wound area is dusted with antibiotic powder. Sham-treated rats undergo an identical surgical procedure except that the sciatic nerve is not manipulated.
Following surgery, animals are weighed and placed on a warm pad until they recover from anesthesia. Animals are then returned to their home cages until behavioral testing begins. The animals are assessed for response to noxious mechanical stimuli by determining PWT, as described below, prior to surgery (baseline), then immediately prior to and 1 , 3, and 5 hours after drug administration for the ipsiiateral (same side as the injury) rear paw of the animal. Percentage reversal of neuropathic hyperalgesia is defined as:
[(post administration PWT) - (pre-administration PWT)]
% reversal = X 1 00
[(baseline PWT) - (pre-administration PWT)] In the Chung model, the spinal nerve ligation model of neuropathic pain is used to produce mechanical hyperalgesia, thermal hyperalgesia and tactile allodynia in rats. Surgery is performed under isoflurane/02 inhalation anesthesia. Following induction of anesthesia a 3 cm incision is made and the left paraspinal muscles are separated from the spinous process at the L4 - S2 levels. The L6 transverse process is carefully removed with a pair of small rongeurs to identify visually the L4 - L6 spinal nerves. The left L5 (or L5 and L6) spinal nerve(s) is (are) isolated and tightly ligated with silk thread. A complete hemostasis is confirmed and the wound is sutured using non-absorbable sutures, such as nylon sutures or stainless steel staples. Sham-treated rats undergo an identical surgical procedure except that the spinal nerve(s) is (are) not manipulated. Following surgery animals are weighed, administered a
subcutaneous (s.c.) injection of saline or ringers lactate, the wound area is dusted with antibiotic powder and they are kept on a warm pad until they recover from the anesthesia. Animals are then returned to their home cages until behavioral testing begins. The animals are assessed for response to noxious mechanical stimuli by determining PWT, as described below, prior to surgery (baseline), then immediately prior to and 1 , 3, and 5 hours after being administered a Compound of the Invention for the left rear paw of the animal. The animals can also be assessed for response to noxious thermal stimuli or for tactile allodynia, as described below. The Chung model for neuropathic pain is described in Kim et al., Pain 50(3):355-363 ( 1992).
Tactile Allodynia: Sensitivity to non-noxious mechanical stimuli can be measured in animals to assess tactile allodynia. Rats are transferred to an elevated testing cage with a wire mesh floor and allowed to acclimate for five to ten minutes. A series of von Frey monofilaments are applied to the plantar surface of the hindpaw to determine the animal's withdrawal threshold. The first filament used possesses a buckling weight of 9.1 gms (.96 log value) and is applied up to five times to see if it elicits a withdrawal response. If the animal has a withdrawal response, then the next lightest filament in the series would be applied up to five times to determine if it also could elicit a response. This procedure is repeated with subsequent lesser filaments until there is no response and the identity of the lightest filament that elicits a response is recorded. If the animal does not have a withdrawal response from the initial 9.1 gms filament, then subsequent filaments of increased weight are applied until a filament elicits a response and the identity of this filament is recorded. For each animal, three measurements are made at every time point to produce an average withdrawal threshold determination. Tests can be performed prior to, and at 1 , 2, 4 and 24 hours post drug administration.
Mechanical Hyperalgesia: Sensitivity to noxious mechanical stimuli can be measured in animals using the paw pressure test to assess mechanical hyperalgesia. In rats, hind paw withdrawal thresholds ("PWT"), measured in grams, in response to a noxious mechanical stimulus are determined using an analgesymeter (Model 7200, commercially available from Ugo Basile of Italy), as described in Stein
(Biochemistry & Behavior 31 : 451 -455 ( 1988)). The rat's paw is placed on a small platform, and weight is applied in a graded manner up to a maximum of 250 grams. The endpoint is taken as the weight at which the paw is completely withdrawn. PWT is determined once for each rat at each time point. PWT can be measured only in the injured paw, or in both the injured and non-injured paw. In one non-limiting embodiment, mechanical hyperalgesia associated with nerve injury induced pain (neuropathic pain) can be assessed in rats. Rats are tested prior to surgery to determine a baseline, or normal, PWT. Rats are tested again 2 to 3 weeks post- surgery, prior to, and at different times after (e.g. 1 , 3, 5 and 24 hr) drug
administration. An increase in PWT following drug administration indicates that the test compound reduces mechanical hyperalgesia.
In Vivo Assay for Anticonvulsant Activity
Compounds of the Invention can be tested for in vivo anticonvulsant activity after i.v., p.o., or i.p. injection using any of a number of anticonvulsant tests in mice or rats, including the maximum electroshock seizure test (MES). Maximum electroshock seizures are induced in male NSA mice weighing between 15-20 g and in male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing between 200-225 g by application of current (for mice: 50 mA, 60 pulses/sec, 0.8 msec pulse width, 1 sec duration, D.C.; for rats: 99 mA, 125 pulses/sec, 0.8 msec pulse width, 2 sec duration, D.C.) using a Ugo Basile ECT device (Model 7801 ). Mice are restrained by gripping the loose skin on their dorsal surface and saline-coated corneal electrodes are held lightly against the two corneae. Rats are allowed free movement on the bench top and ear-clip electrodes are used. Current is applied and animals are observed for a period of up to 30 seconds for the occurrence of a tonic hindlimb extensor response. A tonic seizure is defined as a hindlimb extension in excess of 90 degrees from the plane of the body. Results can be treated in a quantal manner. Pharmaceutical Compositions
Compounds of the Invention can be administered to a mammal in the form of a raw chemical without any other components present. Compounds of the Invention can also be administered to a mammal as part of a pharmaceutical composition containing the compound combined with a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Such a carrier can be selected from pharmaceutically acceptable excipients and auxiliaries.
Pharmaceutical compositions within the scope of the present disclosure include all compositions where a Compound of the Invention is combined with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In one embodiment, the Compound of the Invention is present in the composition in an amount that is effective to achieve its intended therapeutic purpose. While individual needs may vary, a determination of optimal ranges of effective amounts of each compound is within the skill of the art. Typically, a Compound of the Invention can be administered to a mammal, e.g. , a human, orally at a dose of from about 0.0025 to about 1500 mg per kg body weight of the mammal, or an equivalent amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug, or solvate thereof, per day to treat the particular disorder. A useful oral dose of a Compound of the Invention administered to a mammal is from about 0.0025 to about 50 mg per kg body weight of the mammal, or an equivalent amount of the pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug, or solvate thereof. For
intramuscular injection, the dose is typically about one-half of the oral dose. A unit oral dose may comprise from about 0.01 mg to about 1 g of the Compound of the Invention, e.g., about 0.01 mg to about 500 mg, about 0.01 mg to about 250 mg, about 0.01 mg to about 100 mg, 0.01 mg to about 50 mg, e.g. , about 0.1 mg to about 10 mg, of the compound. The unit dose can be administered one or more times daily, e.g. , as one or more tablets or capsules, each containing from about 0.01 mg to about 1 g of the compound, or an equivalent amount of a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug or solvate thereof.
A pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered to any animal that may experience the beneficial effects of a Compound of the Invention. Foremost among such animals are mammals, e.g. , humans and companion animals, although the disclosure is not intended to be so limited.
A pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered by any means that achieves its intended purpose. For example, administration can be by the oral, parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, transdermal, intranasal, transmucosal, rectal, intravaginal or buccal route, or by inhalation. The dosage administered and route of administration will vary, depending upon the circumstances of the particular subject, and taking into account such factors as age, gender, health, and weight of the recipient, condition or disorder to be treated, kind of concurrent treatment, if any, frequency of treatment, and the nature of the effect desired.
In one embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered orally and is formulated into tablets, dragees, capsules or an oral liquid preparation. In one embodiment, the oral formulation comprises extruded multiparticulates comprising the Compound of the Invention.
Alternatively, a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered rectally, and is formulated in suppositories.
Alternatively, a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered by injection.
Alternatively, a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered transdermally. Altematively, a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered by inhalation or by intranasal or transmucosal administration.
Alternatively, a pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can be administered by the intravaginal route.
A pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure can contain from about 0.01 to 99 percent by weight, and preferably from about 0.25 to 75 percent by weight, of active compound(s).
A method of the present disclosure, such as a method for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels in an animal in need thereof, can further comprise administering a second therapeutic agent to the animal in combination with a Compound of the Invention. In one embodiment, the other therapeutic agent is administered in an effective amount.
Effective amounts of the other therapeutic agents are known to those skilled in the art. However, it is well within the skilled artisan's purview to determine the other therapeutic agent's optimal effective-amount range.
Compounds of the Invention (i.e., the first therapeutic agent) and the second therapeutic agent can act additively or, in one embodiment, synergistically.
Alternatively, the second therapeutic agent can be used to treat a disorder or condition that is different from the disorder or condition for which the first therapeutic agent is being administered, and which disorder or condition may or may not be a condition or disorder as defined herein. In one embodiment, a Compound of the Invention is administered concurrently with a second therapeutic agent; for example, a single composition comprising both an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention and an effective amount of the second therapeutic agent can be administered. Accordingly, the present disclosure further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a combination of a Compound of the Invention, the second therapeutic agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Alternatively, a first pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention and a second pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of the second therapeutic agent can be concurrently administered. In another embodiment, an effective amount of a Compound of the Invention is administered prior or subsequent to administration of an effective amount of the second
therapeutic agent. In this embodiment, the Compound of the Invention is
administered while the second therapeutic agent exerts its therapeutic effect, or the 5 second therapeutic agent is administered while the Compound of the Invention exerts its therapeutic effect for treating a disorder or condition.
[0100] The second therapeutic agent can be an opioid agonist, a non-opioid
analgesic, a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agent, an antimigraine agent, a Cox-II inhibitor, a β-adrenergic blocker, an anticonvulsant, an antidepressant, an anticancer
10 agent, an agent for treating addictive disorder, an agent for treating Parkinson's
disease and parkinsonism, an agent for treating anxiety, an agent for treating epilepsy, an agent for treating a seizure, an agent for treating a stroke, an agent for treating a pruritic condition, an agent for treating psychosis, an agent for treating ALS, an agent for treating a cognitive disorder, an agent for treating a migraine, an
15 agent for treating vomiting, an agent for treating dyskinesia, or an agent for treating depression, or a mixture thereof.
[0101] Examples of useful opioid agonists include, but are not limited to, alfentanil, allylprodine, alphaprodine, anileridine, benzylmorphine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, clonitazene, codeine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, dezocine,
20 diampromide, diamorphone, dihydrocodeine, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol,
dimepheptanol, dimethylthiambutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, eptazocine, ethoheptazine, ethylmethylthiambutene, ethyimorphine, etonitazene, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, hydroxypethidine, isomethadone, ketobemidone, levorphanol, levophenacylmorphan, lofentanil, meperidine, meptazinol, metazocine,
25 methadone, metopon, morphine, myrophine, nalbuphine, narceine, nicomorphine, norlevorphanol, normethadone, nalorphine, normorphine, norpipanone, opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, papaveretum, pentazocine, phenadoxone, phenomorphan, phenazocine, phenoperidine, piminodine, piritramide, proheptazine, promedol, properidine, propiram, propoxyphene, sufentanil, tilidine, tramadol, pharmaceutically
30 acceptable salts thereof, and mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, the opioid agonist is selected from codeine, hydromorphone, hydrocodone, oxycodone, dihydrocodeine, dihydromorphine, morphine, tramadol, oxymorphone, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and mixtures thereof.
Examples of useful non-opioid analgesics include non-steroidal antiinflammatory agents, such as aspirin, ibuprofen, diclofenac, naproxen, benoxaprofen, flurbiprofen, fenoprofen, flubufen, ketoprofen, indoprofen, piroprofen, carprofen, oxaprozin, pramoprofen, muroprofen, trioxaprofen, suprofen, aminoprofen, tiaprofenic acid, fluprofen, bucloxic acid, indomethacin, sulindac, tolmetin, zomepirac, tiopinac, zidometacin, acemetacin, fentiazac, clidanac, oxpinac, mefenamic acid, meclofenamic acid, flufenamic acid, niflumic acid, tolfenamic acid, diflurisal, flufenisal, piroxicam, sudoxicam, isoxicam, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and mixtures thereof. Examples of other suitable non-opioid analgesics include the following, non limiting, chemical classes of analgesic, antipyretic, nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs: salicylic acid derivatives, including aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline magnesium trisalicylate, salsalate, diflunisal, salicylsalicylic acid, sulfasalazine, and olsalazin; para aminophennol derivatives including acetaminophen and phenacetin; indole and indene acetic acids, including indomethacin, sulindac, and etodolac; heteroaryl acetic acids, including tolmetin, diclofenac, and ketorolac; anthranilic acids (fenamates), including mefenamic acid, and meclofenamic acid; enolic acids, including oxicams (piroxicam, tenoxicam), and pyrazolidinediones (phenylbutazone, oxyphenthartazone); and alkanones, including nabumetone. For a more detailed description of the NSAIDs, see Paul A. Insel, Analgesic Antipyretic and Antiinflammatory Agents and Drugs Employed in the Treatment of Gout, in Goodman & Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis of
Therapeutics 617-57 (Perry B. Molinhoff and Raymond W. Ruddon eds., 9th ed 1996) and Glen R. Hanson, Analgesic, Antipyretic and Anti Inflammatory Drugs in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy Vol. II 1 196- 1221 (A.R. Gennaro ed. 19th ed. 1995) which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. Suitable Cox-II inhibitors and 5-lipoxygenase inhibitors, as well as combinations thereof, are described in U.S. Patent No. 6, 136,839, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Examples of useful Cox II inhibitors include, but are not limited to, rofecoxib, and celecoxib.
Examples of useful antimigraine agents include, but are not limited to, alpiropride, bromocriptine, dihydroergotamine, dolasetron, ergocornine,
ergocorninine, ergocryptine, ergonovine, ergot, ergotamine, flumedroxone acetate, fonazine, ketanserin, lisuride, lomerizine, methylergonovine, methysergide, metoprolol, naratriptan, oxetorone, pizotyline, propranolol, risperidone, rizatriptan, sumatriptan, timolol, trazodone, zolmitriptan, and mixtures thereof.
Examples of useful β-adrenergic blockers include, but are not limited to, acebutolol, alprenolol, amosulabol, arotinolol, atenolol, befunolol, betaxolol, bevantolol, bisoprolol, bopindolol, bucumolol, bufetolol, bufuralol, bunitrolol, bupranolol, butidrine hydrochloride, butofilolol, carazolol, carteolol, carvedilol, celiprolol, cetamolol, cloranolol, dilevalol, epanolol, esmolol, indenolol, labetalol, levobunolol, mepindolol, metipranolol, metoprolol, moprolol, nadolol, nadoxolol, nebivalol, nifenalol, nipradilol, oxprenolol, penbutolol, pindolol, practolol, pronethalol, propranolol, sotalol, sulfinalol, talinolol, tertatolol, tilisolol, timolol, toliprolol, and xibenolol.
Examples of useful anticonvulsants include, but are not limited to, acetylpheneturide, albutoin, aloxidone, aminoglutethimide, 4-amino-3- hydroxybutyric acid, atrolactamide, beclamide, buramate, calcium bromide, carbamazepine, cinromide, clomethiazole, clonazepam, decimemide, diethadione, dimethadione, doxenitroin, eterobarb, ethadione, ethosuximide, ethotoin, felbamate, fluoresone, gabapentin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, lamotrigine, magnesium bromide, magnesium sulfate, mephenytoin, mephobarbital, metharbital, methetoin, methsuximide, 5-methyl-5-(3-phenanthryl)-hydantoin, 3-methyl-5-phenylhydantoin, narcobarbital, nimetazepam, nitrazepam, oxcarbazepine, paramethadione, phenacemide, phenetharbital, pheneturide, phenobarbital, phensuximide, phenylmethylbarbituric acid, phenytoin, phethenylate sodium, potassium bromide, pregabaline, primidone, progabide, sodium bromide, solanum, strontium bromide, suclofenide, sulthiame, tetrantoin, tiagabine, topiramate, trimethadione, valproic acid, valpromide, vigabatrin, and zonisamide.
Examples of useful antidepressants include, but are not limited to, binedaline, caroxazone, citalopram, (S)-citalopram, dimethazan, fencamine, indalpine, indeloxazine hydrocholoride, nefopam, nomifensine, oxitriptan, oxypertine, paroxetine, sertraline, thiazesim, trazodone, benmoxine, iproclozide, iproniazid, isocarboxazid, nialamide, octamoxin, phenelzine, cotinine, rolicyprine, rolipram, maprotiline, metralindole, mianserin, mirtazepine, adinazolam, amitriptyline, amitriptylinoxide, amoxapine, butriptyline, clomipramine, demexiptiline, desipramine, dibenzepin, dimetacrine, dothiepin, doxepin, fluacizine, imipramine, imipramine N-oxide, iprindole, lofepramine, melitracen, metapramine, nortriptyline, noxiptilin, opipramol, pizotyline, propizepine, protriptyline, quinupramine, tianeptine, trimipramine, adrafinil, benactyzine, bupropion, butacetin, dioxadrol, duloxetine, etoperidone, febarbamate, femoxetine, fenpentadiol, fluoxetine, fluvoxamine, hematoporphyrin, hypericin, levophacetoperane, medifoxamine, milnacipran, minaprine, moclobemide, nefazodone, oxaflozane, piberaline, prolintane, pyrisuccideanol, ritanserin, roxindole, rubidium chloride, sulpiride, tandospirone, thozalinone, tofenacin, toloxatone, tranylcypromine, L-tryptophan, venlafaxine, viloxazine, and zimeldine.
Examples of useful anticancer agents include, but are not limited to, acivicin, aclarubicin, acodazole hydrochloride, acronine, adozelesin, aldesleukin, altretamine, ambomycin, ametantrone acetate, aminoglutethimide, amsacrine, anastrozole, anthramycin, asparaginase, asperlin, azacitidine, azetepa, azotomycin, batimastat, benzodepa, bicalutamide, bisantrene hydrochloride, bisnafide dimesylate, bizelesin, bleomycin sulfate, brequinar sodium, bropirimine, busulfan, cactinomycin, calusterone, caracemide, carbetimer, carboplatin, carmustine, carubicin
hydrochloride, carzelesin, cedefingol, chlorambucil, cirolemycin, and cisplatin.
Therapeutic agents useful for treating an addictive disorder include, but are not limited to, methadone, desipramine, amantadine, fluoxetine, buprenorphine, an opiate agonist, 3-phenoxypyridine, or a serotonin antagonist. Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating Parkinson's disease and parkinsonism include, but are not limited to, carbidopa/levodopa, pergolide, bromocriptine, ropinirole, pramipexole, entacapone, tolcapone, selegiline, amantadine, and trihexyphenidyl hydrochloride.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating anxiety include, but are not limited to, benzodiazepines, such as alprazolam, brotizolam, chlordiazepoxide, clobazam, clonazepam, clorazepate, demoxepam, diazepam, estazolam, flumazenil, flurazepam, halazepam, lorazepam, midazolam, nitrazepam, nordazepam, oxazepam, prazepam, quazepam, temazepam, and triazolam; non-benzodiazepine agents, such as buspirone, gepirone, ipsapirone, tiospirone, zolpicone, Zolpidem, and zaleplon; tranquilizers, such as barbituates, e.g., amobarbital, aprobarbital, butabarbital, butalbital, mephobarbital, methohexital, pentobarbital, phenobarbital, secobarbital, and thiopental; and propanediol carbamates, such as meprobamate and tybamate.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating epilepsy or seizure include, but are not limited to, carbamazepine, ethosuximide, gabapentin, lamotrigine, phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone, valproic acid, trimethadione, benzodiazepines, gamma-vinyl GABA, acetazolamide, and felbamate.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating stroke include, but are not limited to, anticoagulants such as heparin, agents that break up clots such as streptokinase or tissue plasminogen activator, agents that reduce swelling such as mannitol or corticosteroids, and acetylsalicylic acid.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating a pruritic condition include, but are not limited to, naltrexone; nalmefene; danazol; tricyclics such as amitriptyline, imipramine, and doxepin; antidepressants such as those given below; menthol; camphor; phenol; pramoxine; capsaicin; tar; steroids; and antihistamines.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating psychosis include, but are not limited to, phenothiazines such as chlorpromazine hydrochloride, mesoridazine besylate, and thoridazine hydrochloride; thioxanthenes such as chloroprothixene and thiothixene hydrochloride; clozapine; risperidone; olanzapine; quetiapine; quetiapine fumarate; haloperidol; haloperidol decanoate; loxapine succinate; molindone hydrochloride; pimozide; and ziprasidone.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating ALS include, but are not limited to, baclofen, neurotrophic factors, riluzole, tizanidine, benzodiazepines such as clonazepan and dantrolene.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating cognitive disorders include, but are not limited to, agents for treating dementia such as tacrine;
donepezil; ibuprofen; antipsychotic drugs such as thioridazine and haloperidol; and antidepressant drugs such as those given below.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating a migraine include, but are not limited to, sumatriptan; methysergide; ergotamine; caffeine; and beta-blockers such as propranolol, verapamil, and divalproex.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating vomiting include, but are not limited to, 5-HT3 receptor antagonists such as ondansetron, dolasetron, granisetron, and tropisetron; dopamine receptor antagonists such as prochlorperazine, thiethylperazine, chlorpromazine, metoclopramide, and domperidone;
glucocorticoids such as dexamethasone; and benzodiazepines such as lorazepam and alprazolam.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating dyskinesia include, but are not limited to, reserpine and tetrabenazine.
Examples of useful therapeutic agents for treating depression include, but are not limited to, tricyclic antidepressants such as amitryptyline, amoxapine, bupropion, clomipramine, desipramine, doxepin, imipramine, maprotiline, nefazadone, nortriptyline, protriptyline, trazodone, trimipramine, and venlafaxine; selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors such as citalopram, (S)-citalopram, fluoxetine, fiuvoxamine, paroxetine, and setraline; monoamine oxidase inhibitors such as isocarboxazid, pargyline, phenelzine, and tranylcypromine; and psychostimulants such as dextroamphetamine and methylphenidate.
A pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure is manufactured in a manner which itself will be known in view of the instant disclosure, for example, by means of conventional mixing, granulating, dragee-making, dissolving, extrusion, or lyophilizing processes. Thus, pharmaceutical compositions for oral use can be obtained by combining the active compound with solid excipients, optionally grinding the resulting mixture and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired or necessary, to obtain tablets or dragee cores.
Suitable excipients include fillers such as saccharides (for example, lactose, sucrose, mannitol or sorbitol), cellulose preparations, calcium phosphates (for example, tricalcium phosphate or calcium hydrogen phosphate), as well as binders such as starch paste (using, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, or potato starch), gelatin, tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and/or polyvinyl pyrrolidone. If desired, one or more disintegrating agents can be added, such as the above-mentioned starches and also carboxymethyl-starch, cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
Auxiliaries are typically flow-regulating agents and lubricants such as, for example, silica, talc, stearic acid or salts thereof (e.g., magnesium stearate or calcium stearate), and polyethylene glycol. Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings that are resistant to gastric juices. For this purpose, concentrated saccharide solutions can be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. In order to produce coatings resistant to gastric juices, solutions of suitable cellulose preparations such as acetylcellulose phthalate or hydroxypropymethyl-cellulose phthalate can be used. Dye stuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings, for example, for
identification or in order to characterize combinations of active compound doses.
Examples of other pharmaceutical preparations that can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, or soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fit capsules can contain a compound in the form of granules, which can be mixed with fillers such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers, or in the form of extruded multiparticulates. In soft capsules, the active compounds are preferably dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils or liquid paraffin. In addition, stabilizers can be added.
Possible pharmaceutical preparations for rectal administration include, for example, suppositories, which consist of a combination of one or more active compounds with a suppository base. Suitable suppository bases include natural and synthetic triglycerides, and paraffin hydrocarbons, among others. It is also possible to use gelatin rectal capsules consisting of a combination of active compound with a base material such as, for example, a liquid triglyceride, polyethylene glycol, or paraffin hydrocarbon.
Suitable formulations for parenteral administration include aqueous solutions of the active compound in a water-soluble form such as, for example, a water-soluble salt, alkaline solution, or acidic solution. Alternatively, a suspension of the active compound can be prepared as an oily suspension. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles for such as suspension may include fatty oils (for example, sesame oil), synthetic fatty acid esters (for example, ethyl oleate), triglycerides, or a polyethylene glycol such as polyethylene glycol-400 (PEG-400). An aqueous suspension may contain one or more substances to increase the viscosity of the suspension, including, for example, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, and/or dextran. The suspension may optionally contain stabilizers.
The following examples are illustrative, but not limiting, of the compounds, compositions, and methods of the present disclosure. Suitable modifications and adaptations of the variety of conditions and parameters normally encountered in clinical therapy and which are obvious to those skilled in the art in view of this disclosure are within the spirit and scope of the disclosure.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Synthesis of 2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- 1 ,3,2-dioxaborolane (Compound 6) Scheme 1
Figure imgf000077_0001
As shown in Scheme 1 , a well stirred mixture of 4-chloro-2-fluorophenol (1) (14.62 g, 99.8 mmol), 1 -fluoro-4-nitrobenzene (2) (12.80 g, 90.72 mmol) and sodium carbonate (19.23 g, 181.43 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) was heated at 100°C for 12 h. LC MS showed that the reaction was complete. The cooled reaction mixture was poured into 350 mL of water with stirring and extracted with 2 X 100 mL of dichloromethane. The combined organic layers were dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. Purification by chromatography yielded 24.2 g (99%) of 4-chloro-2-fluoro- l -(4- nitrophenoxy)benzene (3) as a pale yellow solid. 'H NMR CDC13: 8.25-8.18 (m, 2H); 7.28-7.15 (m, 3H); 7.08-6.97 (m, 2H). Unless otherwise indicated all NMR chemical shifts reported herein are denoted by the delta (δ) scale.
To a well stirred suspension of 4-chloro-2-fluoro-l -(4-nitrophenoxy)benzene (3) (24.0 g, 89.67 mmol) in ethanol (180 mL) was added Pd on carbon (50% water, 4.8 g 2.5 mole %) and the reaction mixture was cooled to 0°C internal temperature. Solid sodium borohydride (4.07 g, 89.67 mmol) was added at a rate such that the internal temperature remained below 25°C. After addition, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. LC/MS showed that the reaction was complete. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (80 mL), filtered through a pad of Celite, the Celite was washed with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic fractions were concentrated to yield the crude aniline as a brown paste. The crude product was dissolved in hot acetonitrile ( 150 mL) and a hot solution of tosic acid hydrate (17.91 g, 1 .05 eq.) in acetonitrile (25 mL) was added. The resulting solution was stirred and allowed to cool to room temperature. The resulting tan solid was isolated by vacuum filtration, washed with acetonitrile and allowed to dry to yield 4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)aniline as the tosic acid salt (4a) (32.2 g, 87%). LC/MS: m/z = 238 [M+H]+.
To a well stirred suspension of 4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)aniline tosic acid salt (4a) (32.2 g, 78.56 mmol) and tosic acid hydrate (29.89 g 157. 1 mmol) in acetonitrile (630 mL) cooled to 0°C internal temperature was added a solution of sodium nitrite ( 1 1 g, 157 mmol) and potassium iodide (32.6 g, 196.4 mmol) in water ( 157 mL) at a rate such that the reaction temperature remained below 25°C and any foaming was controlled. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature an additional two hours. LC/MS showed that the reaction was complete. The acetonitrile was removed under reduced pressure, and the residue was partitioned between dichloromethane and aqueous sodium sulfite. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted 2 X 50 mL with dichloromethane. The combined organic layers were dried (MgS04) and
concentrated to yield the crude product as a brown oil. Purification by
chromatography (silica gel DCM in hexanes 0% to 15%) yielded 1 5.7 g (57%) of pure 4-chloro-2-fluoro- l -(4-iodophenoxy)benzene (5). Ή NMR CDC13: 7.82-7.58 (m, 2H); 7.22-7.18 (m, 1 H); 7.12-7.08 (m, 1 H); 7.02-6.88 (m, l H);6.75-6.48 (m, 2H).
A suspension of 4-chloro-2-fluoro-l -(4-iodophenoxy)benzene (5) ( 15.0 g, 43.04 mmol), pinacol diborane ( 12.57 g, 49.5 mmol), and potassium acetate ( 12.67 g, 129 mmol) in DMF (86mL) was degassed under reduced pressure and flushed with argon three times. [ Ι , Γ-bis (diphenylphosphino) ferrocene] dichloropalladium(II) (1.23 g, 1.51 mmol) was added and the reaction was heated at 80°C under inert atmosphere for 4 hours. LC/MS indicated that the reaction was complete. The cooled reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted 3 X 50 mL with dichloromethane. The combined organic layers were dried (MgSOii) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. Purification by chromatography (silica gel 2/1 hexanes/DCM) yielded 7.6 g (50%) of pure 2-(4-(4- chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l ,3,2-dioxaborolane (6). Ή NMR CDC13: 7.80-7.75 (m, 2H); 7.22-7.18 (m, 1 H); 7.12-7.08 (m, 1 H); 7.02-6.88 (m, l H);6.95-6.90 (m, 2H).
EXAMPLE 2
Synthesis of (R)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 7)
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000080_0001
As shown in Scheme 2, a mixture of 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l ,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenol (12) (Aldrich, 4.6 g, 21 mmol), 4-chloro- l , 2- difluorobenzene (13) (Aldrich, 3.09 g, 22 mmol) and Cs2C03 (Aldrich, 8.6 g, 26 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) was heated at 120°C for 12 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was purified using Combiflash (80 g silica gel, 0- 10% EtOAc/Hexane) to give 2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- 1 ,3,3-dioxaborolane (14) (1.8 g).
A sealed pressure bottle containing a mixture of methyl 2,6- dichloropyrimidine-4-carboxylate (7) (Aldrich, 1 g, 4.83 mmol), 4,4,5,5-tetrametyl- 2-vinyl-l ,3,2-dioxaborolane (8) (Aldrich, 1.2 mL, 7.0 mmol), PdCl2(PPh3)2 (Aldrich, 315 mg, 0.39 mmol), and Cs2C03 (Aldrich, 3.15 g, 9.6 mmol) in DME (5mL), EtOH (2 mL), and H20 (5 mL) was heated at 70°C for 3.5 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) and brine (50 mL). The mixture was adjusted to pH 1 with 4N aqueous HCl solution. After separation, the aqueous layer was further extracted with EtOAc (2 X 50 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried with Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified using Combiflash ( 12 g silica gel, 0-100% EtOAc/Hexane) to give compound 9 (800 mg) as red liquid.
A sealed pressure bottle containing compound 9 (956 mg, 5.2 mmol), 2-(4-(5- chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l ,3,3-dioxaborolane (14) ( 1.8 g, 5.2 mmol), PdCl2(PPh3)2 (292 mg, 0.42 mmol), and Cs2C03 (3.4 g, 10.4 mmol) in DME (6 mL), EtOH (3 mL), and H20 (6 mL) was heated at 95°C for 4 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was adjusted to pH 4 with 4N HCl aqueous solution. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2 X 50 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried with Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. To the residue was added Et20, The mixture was sonicated and the solid was collected to give pure compound 10 (800 mg). The Et20 solution was concentrated and triturated with EtOAc in hexane to obtain additional compound 10.
To a solution of compound 10 (800 mg, 2.2 mmol) in DMF at 0°C was added HBTU (983 mg, 2.6 mmol), (NH4)2C03 (422 mg, 4.4 mmol), and DIEA (1.2 mL, 6.6 mmol). The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature slowly over 2 h with stirring. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2 X 100 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried with Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified using Combiflash (40 g silica gel, 0-40% EtOAc/Hexane, then 12 g silica gel, 0-40% EtOAc Hexane) to give pure compound 11 ( 180 mg).
To a solution of compound 11 (91 mg, 0.24 mmol) in iPrOH (2 mL) at 0°C was added H20 (2 mL). To the resulting white milky suspension was added AD- Mix-β (1.2 g). The resulting mixture was vigorously stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 X 50 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried with Na2S0 , filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified using Combiflash (4 g silica gel, 0-60%
EtOAc/Hexane) to give (R)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 7) (40 mg) as white solid. Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8.51 (2H, d, J=8.8 Hz), 8.03 ( I H, s), 7.22-7.12 (3H, m), 6.99 (2H, d, J=9.2 Hz), 4.74 (I H, dd, J=3.6, 5.6 Hz), 3.89 (I H, dd, J=4.0, 1 1.6 Hz), 3.76 (I H, dd, J=5.6, 1 1.2 Hz); LC/MS: m/z= 404[M+H]+.
(S)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( 1 ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 8) was prepared in a similar fashion to (R)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 7) using AD- Mix-a instead of AD-Mix-β. Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD30D): 8.64 (2H, d, J=9.2 Hz), 8.17 (I H, s), 7.35-7.24 (3H, m), 7.1 1 (2H, d, J=12 Hz), 4.86 (I H, dd, J=3.6, 5.6 Hz), 4.02 ( I H, dd, J=4.0, 1 1.6 Hz), 3.89 (I H, dd, J=5.6, 1 1.2 Hz); LC/MS: m/z=
404[M+H]+.
(R)-2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 9) was prepared in a similar fashion to (R)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 7) using 2-(4-(4-chloro-2- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l ,3,3-dioxaborolane (6) instead of 2-(4- (5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l ,3,3-dioxaborolane (14). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8.49 (2H, d, J=8.8 Hz), 8.03 (I H, s), 7.30 (I H, dd, J=2.8, 10 Hz), 7.18-7.10 (2H, m), 6.96 (2H, d, J=9.2 Hz), 4.73 ( I H, dd, J=3.2, 5.6 Hz), 3.89 (I H, dd, J=3.6, 1 1 Hz), 3.75 (I H, dd, J=6.0, 1 1 Hz); LC/MS: m/z= 404[M+H]+. Compound 6 was prepared according to Scheme 1 in Example 1.
(S)-2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( 1 ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 10) was prepared in a similar fashion to (R)-2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 9) using AD- mix-ot instead of AD-Mix-β. Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD30D): 8.49 (2H, d, J=8.8 Hz), 8.03 ( I H, s), 7.30 ( I H, dd, 3=2 A, 10 Hz), 7.18-7.10 (2H, m), 6.96 (2H, d, J=9.2 Hz), 4.73 (l H, dd, J=3.6, 6.4 Hz), 3.89 ( I H, dd, J=3.6, 1 1 Hz), 3.75 ( I H, dd, J=6.0, 1 1 Hz); LC/MS: m/z= 404[M+H]+.
EXAMPLE 3
Synthesis of (R)-4-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-2-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 20)
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000084_0001
Compound Example No. 20 As shown in Scheme 3, a sealed pressure bottle containing compound 15
(Aldrich, 1 g, 5.2 mmol), compound 16 ( 1.62 g, 5.4 mmol), PdCl2(PPh3)2 (290 mg, 0.41 mmol), and Cs2C03 (3.4 g, 10.4 mmol) in DME ( 16 mL), ethanol (8 mL), and H20 (16 mL) was heated at 60°C for 3 h. After cooling, the mixture was diluted with EtOAc (200 mL) and brine (100 mL). After separation, the organic layer was dried with a2S04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give compound 17 as yellow solid.
Compound 17 was dissolved in methanol (50 mL) and 2N HC1 in dioxane (2 mL) was added. The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 12 h. After removing the methanol, the residue was diluted with EtOAc (200 mL) and washed successively with brine ( l OOmL), NaHC03 solution, ( 100 mL), and brine ( l OOmL). The organic layer was dried with Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified using Combiflash (80 g silica gel, 0-50% EtOAc in hexane) to give compound 18 as light yellow solid ( 1 .4 g).
A sealed vial containing a solution of compound 18 (1 .4 g, 3.9 mmol), compound 8 ( 1 .2 mL, 7 mmol), and PdCl2(dppf>2 (255 mg, 0.3 1 mmol) in TBAF (Aldrich, 12 mL, 1 M THF solution) was heated at 70°C for 3 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was purified using Combiflash (40 g silica gel, 0~50% EtOAc in hexanes) to give compound 19 (21 1 mg) as a solid. The corresponding acid was also formed but not isolated.
To a mixture of compound 19 ( 105 mg, 0.3 mmol) in i-PrOH (2mL) and H20 (2mL) at 0°C was added AD-Mix-β (392 mg) and the resulting mixture was stirred vigorously for 12 h. Only compound 20 was observed in the reaction. The reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc (5mL) and the aqueous layer was freeze-dried. The material thus obtained was washed with methanol (2 X 10 mL) and filtered. To the filtrate was added 2 N HC1 in dioxane ( l mL) and the resulting material was stirred at room temperature for 12 h. After removing the methanol, the residue was purified using Combiflash ( 12 g silica gel, 0-100% EtOAc in hexanes) to give compound 21 (56 mg) as clear oil.
Compound 21 (56 mg, 0. 14 mmol) was dissolved in 7 N NH3 in methanol (5 mL) at room temperature and stirred for 12. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give (R)-4-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-2-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 20). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8.50 (2H, d, J=9.2 Hz), 8.34 ( 1 H, s), 7.35-7.24 (6H, m), 5.01 ( I H, m), 4.10 (I H, dd, J=4.4, 12 Hz), 4.02 (I H, dd, J-5.2, 12 Hz); LC/MS: m/z= 370[M+H]+.
(S)-4-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-2- carboxamide (Compound Example No. 21) was prepared in a similar fashion to (R)- 4-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-2-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 20) using AD-Mix-a instead of AD-Mix-β. Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8.25 (2H, d, J=8.8 Hz), 8.09 (I H, s), 7.09-6.98 (6H, m), 4.75 (I H, m), 4.10 ( I H, dd, J=3.6, 12 Hz), 3.77 ( I H, dd, J=5.2, 12 Hz); LC/MS: m/∑=
370[M+H]+.
EXAMPLE 4
Synthesis of (S)-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No, 1 )
heme 4
Figure imgf000087_0001
Compound Example No. 1
As shown in in Scheme 4, a suspension of 2-chloro-6-vinylpyrimidine-4- carboxylic acid (9) (4.38 g, 0.02mol), 2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5- tetramethy]-l ,3,2-dioxaborolane (22) (7.45 g, 0.02mol), Na2C03 (5.3 g, 0.05mol), and PdCl2(PPh3)2 (Aldrich, 701 mg. l .O mmol) in dimethoxy ethane(DME)/ EtOH/H20 (500mL, 2: 1 :2 ratio) was degassed by repeating with Ar2/vacuum cycles. The mixture was heated at 90°C for 23 h. Upon cooling to the room temperature, the mixture was poured into DCM. The solids were filtered off and the filtrates were washed with H20 and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried with anhydrous MgS04 and concentrated to give 2-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid (23) pale yellow oil which was then purified by column chromatography (EtOAc : Hexanes = 1 : 1 ) to give 6.5 g (82% yield), Rf = 0.3 ( DCM: MeOH = 9: 1 ); LC/MS: m/z= 337 [M+H]+.
2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid (23)
(580 mg, 1.73 mmol), HOBt (279.5 mg, 2.07 mmol), and EDC (395.4 mg, 2.07 mmol) in dry dichloromethane were stirred for 20 minutes at room temperature and MeOH (3.46 mL, 86.5 mmol) was added thereto. After the reaction was complete, the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane which was then washed with H20. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgS04 and concentrated to give oily residue. The resulting oil was purified by Combiflash (50%EtOAc in Hexanes) to give methyl 2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)- 6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylate (24) (568 mg, 94% yield). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8.45 (2H, d, J=8.5 Hz), 7.74 ( I H, s), 6.90-7.01 (6H, m), 6.77-6.86 (I H, dd, J=l 1 , 18 Hz), 6.60 (I H, d, J=17 Hz), 5.7 (I H, d, J=10.5 Hz), 3.98 (3H, s); LC/MS: m/z= 351 [M+H]+.
(S)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxylic acid (25) was prepared in a similar fashion to compound 20 (Scheme 3) using AD mix-a (1 .51 g) and compound 24 (360 mg, 1.03 mmol) in aqueous isopropyl alcohol (i-PrOH: H20 = 1 : 1). (304 mg, 80% yield); LC/MS: m/z=
371 [M+Hf.
(S)-methyl 6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxylate (26) was prepared in a similar fashion to compound 21 (Scheme 3) using compound 25 (89 mg, 0.24 mmol), 4N HCl/dioxane (1.0 mL) and MeOH (2 mL). (90 mg, 97% yield). Rf= 0.5 (EtOAc: Hexanes= 1 : 1 ); LC/MS: m/z= 385[M+H]+.
(S)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide (Compound Example No. 1 ) was prepared in a similar fashion to (R)-4- ( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-2-carboxamide using compound 26 (90 mg, 0.23 mmol). (67 mg, 79%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8.60 (2H, d, J=8.9 Hz), 8.15 (I H, s), 7.04-7.22 (6H, m), 6.77-6.86 (I H, dd, J=l 1 , 18 Hz), 6.60 ( 1 H, d, J=17 Hz), 5.7 ( 1 H, d, J=10.5 Hz), 3.98 (3H, s); LC/MS: m/z= 370[M+H]+.
(R)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide (Compound Example No. 2) was prepared in a similar fashion to (S)-6- (l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 1 ) wherein the R-isomer of compound 33 ( 185 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used to give the desired product as off-white solid ( 163 mg, 92% yield). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8.60 (2H, d, J=8.9 Hz), 8.15 ( 1 H, s), 7.04-7.22 (6H, m), 4.84-4.85 (1 H, m), 4.02 (1 H, dd, J=3.9, 1 1.4Hz), 3.88 ( 1 H, dd, J=3.9, 1 1 .4 Hz), 3.98 (3H, s); LC/MS: m/z= 370[M+H]+.
EXAMPLE 5
Synthesis of (R)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 12)
Scheme 5
Figure imgf000089_0001
4-Fluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)benzonitrile (53 g, 280.4 mmol, AK Scientific) was treated with 4-iodophenol (61.7 g, 280.4 mmol, Aldrich) and sodium carbonate (44.6 g, 420.6 mmol) in 90 mL anhydrous DMF at 100°C for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with 250 mL water and extracted with 2 X 200 mL EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to give 4-(4-iodophenoxy)-2-(trifluoromethyl)benzonitrile as a white solid (75 g, 69%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): 7.80-7.72 (3 H, m), 7.36-7.32 (1 H, m), 7.17-7.10 (1 H, m), 6.89-6.82 (2 H, m).
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000090_0001
4-(4-Iodophenoxy)-2-trifluoromethyl benzonitrile (20 g, 51.4 mmol) was treated with bis-pinacol boronate (13 g, 51.4 mmol, NetChem), OAc ( 10 g, 102.8 mmol), and PdCl2dppf*CH2Cl2 (2.1 g, 2.57 mmol) in 50 mL dioxane at 100°C for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with 500 mL water and extracted with 2 x 300 mL EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with 250 mL brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed on silica using a gradient of EtOAc (20% max) in hexane as the eluent to give 4-(4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)benzonitrile (1 1.45 g, 57%). 1 H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13):
7.93-7.86 (2 H, m), 7.79-7.71 (1 H, m), 7.36-7.32 ( 1 H, m), 7.17-7.12 (1 H, m), 7.10- 7.04 (2 H, m), 1.38-1.34 (12 H, s).
Scheme 7
Figure imgf000090_0002
A 100 mL round bottom flask was charged with 4-(4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenoxy)-2-(trifluoromethyl)benzonitrile ( 1.5 g, 3.86 mmol), 2-chloro-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid (709.5 mg, 3.86 mmol), PdCl2(PPh3)2 (190 mg, 0.27 mmol), and cesium carbonate (2.5 g, 7.72 mmol) in DME (8 mL), EtOH (4 mL), and water (8 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to 90°C for 10 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with 100 mL water, acidified to pH 5 with aqueous 4N HC1, and extracted with 2 x 100 mL EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give 2-(4-(4- cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid as a light brown solid. The material was used in the next step without purification.
LC/MS: m/z = 412 [M+H]+.
Scheme 8
Figure imgf000091_0001
In a 50-mL vial with a screw-top septum 2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl) phenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid (340 mg, 0.83 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (5 mL) and treated with potassium carbonate (343.6 mg, 2.49 mmol) and iodomethane (0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for three hours, diluted with 100 mL water, and extracted with 2 x 50 mL diethyl ether. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide methyl 2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)
phenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylate. The residue was used in the next step without purification. LC/MS: m/z = 426 [M+H]+.
Scheme 9
Figure imgf000092_0001
In a 50-mL vial with a screw-top septum, methyl 2-(4-(4-cyano-3- (trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxylate was dissolved in MeOH (2 mL) and stirred at room temperature. To the solution was added 7N NH3/MeOH (5 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and purified using Combiflash with a gradient of methanol (30% max) in chloroform to provide 2-(4-(4-cyano-3- (trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxamide (270 mg) as a white solid. LC/MS: m/z = 41 1 [M+H]+.
Scheme 10
Figure imgf000092_0002
In a 50-mL vial with a screw-top septum was suspended 2-(4-(4-cyano-3- (trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxamide (50 mg, 0.12 mmol) in isopropanol (5 mL) and water (5 mL). To the suspension was added AD Mix beta (200 mg) in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 8 hours, diluted with 50 mL water, and extracted with 2 x 50 mL EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed using methanol (40% max) in chloroform as the eluent to provide ( ?)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)
phenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide ( 12 mg) as a white solid. Ή NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8.79-8.73 (2 H, m), 8.68-8.63 ( 1 H, m), 8.21 -8.17 (1 H, m), 8.07-8.03 ( 1 H, m), 8.02-7.97 (1 H, m), 7.67-7.62 ( 1 H, m), 7.49-7.43 (1 H, m), 7.42-7.35 (2 H, m), 5.85-5.81 (1 H, m), 4.87-4.81 (1 H, m), 4.75- 4.68 (1 H, m), 3.86-3.78 (1 H, m), 3.73-3.65 (1 H, m); LC/MS: m/z = 445 [M+H]+.
(5)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2- dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 13) was prepared in a similar fashion to (/?)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)
phenoxy)phenyl)-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxy-ethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 12) using AD-Mix alpha instead of AD-Mix beta. Ή NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.80-8.70 (2 H, m), 8.69-8.61 (1 H, m), 8.23-8.15 (1 H, m), 8.07-8.02 (1 H, m), 8.01 -7.96 ( 1 H, m), 7.67-7.60 ( 1 H, m), 7.49-7.41 ( 1 H, m), 7.42-7.34 (2 H, m), 5.86-5.78 ( 1 H, m), 4.87-4.79 ( 1 H, m), 4.75-4.66 ( 1 H, m), 3.85-3.76 ( 1 H, m), 3.74-3.63 (1 H, m); LC/MS: m/z = 445 [M+H]+.
f/?)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 18) was prepared a similarly to ( ?)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 12) using 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- 2-(4-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)- 1 ,3 ,2-dioxaborolane. 1 H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8.75-8.67 (2 H, m), 8.65-8.59 (1 H, m), 8.05-8.01 (1 H, m), 8.01 -7.94 (1 H, m), 7.83-7.75 (2 H, m), 7.31 -7.22 (4 H, m), 5.84-5.79 (1 H, m), 4.87-4.79 ( 1 H, m), 4.73-4.67 (1 H, m), 3.86-3.77 (1 H, m), 3.74-3.64 ( 1 H, m); LC/MS: m/z = 420 [M+H]+.
f5)-6-(l ;2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 17) was prepared in a similar fashion to (7?)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 18) using AD-Mix-a instead of AD-Mix-β. Ή NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8.77-8.66 (2 H, m), 8.66-8.56 ( 1 H, m), 8.06-8.00 ( 1 H, m), 8.00-7.94 (1 H, m), 7.84-7.73 (2 H, m), 7.31 -7.20 (4 H, m), 5.85-5.77 ( 1 H, m), 4.88-4.78 ( 1 H, m), 4.74-4.64 ( 1 H, m), 3.87-3.76 ( 1 H, m), 3.73- 3.63 ( 1 H, m); LC/MS: m/z - 420 [M+H]+.
EXAMPLE 6
Synthesis of N-((S)- 1 -amino- 1 -oxopropan-2-yl)-6-((S)- 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)- 2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 16)
Scheme 1 1
Figure imgf000094_0001
A mixture of orotic acid mono hydrate (34.828 g, 200.0 mmol), phosphorus oxychloride ( 100 mL, 1092 mmol) and 20 drops of DMF were heated at 1 10°C overnight. After cooling, the dark mixture was treated with 500 mL hexanes and vigorously stirred. The hexane layer was decanted and quickly washed with water ( 1 x 100 mL) and brine ( 1 x 100 mL) and dried over MgS04. The organics were filtered and carefully evaporated in vacuo to give 2,6-dichloropyrimidine-4-carbonyl chloride as a light yellow liquid (26.13 g, 123.6 mmol, 62% yield). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): 7.93 ( 1 H, s).
eme 12
Figure imgf000094_0002
To a mixture of (S)-methyl 2-aminopropanoate hydrochloride ( 1 .397 g, 10.01 mmol) in DCM (80 mL) was added iPr2NEt (4.35 mL, 24.97 mmol). The mixture was stirred for a few minutes and a solution of the 2,6-dichloropyrimidine-4- carbonyl chloride (2.107 g, 9.97 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) was added over a period of 1 minute. After stirring overnight, the reaction was concentrated in vacuo to a residue. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel using 10-40% EtOAc in hexanes. The product fractions were evaporated in vacuo to give (S)-methyl 2-(2,6- dichloropyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoate as a yellow oil (0.921 g, 3.31 mmol, 33% yield). LC/MS: m/z= 278.1 [M+H]+.
Scheme 13
Figure imgf000095_0001
To a mixture of (S)-methyl 2-(2,6-dichloropyrimidine-4- carboxamido)propanoate (0.921 g, 3.31 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) was added 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-vinyl-l ,3,2-dioxaborolane (0.65 mL, 3.8 mmol), Na2C03 (0.704 g, 6.64 mmol), and PdCl2(dppf) (0, 142 g, 0.17 mmol). The reaction vessel was flushed with argon, sealed, and heated at 80°C overnight. Additional 4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-2-vinyl- l ,3,2-dioxaborolane (0.65 mL, 3.8 mmol) was added. After 7 hours at 80°C, additional 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-vinyl- l ,3,2-dioxaborolane (0.65 mL, 3.8 mmol) was added. After stirring at 80°C for 4 more days the reaction was concentrated in vacuo to a residue and chromatographed over silica gel using 0-70% EtOAc in hexanes. The product fractions were evaporated in vacuo to give (S)- methyl 2-(2-chloro-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoate as a yellow oil (0.444 g, 1 .65 mmol, 50% yield). LC/MS: m/z= 270.2 [M+H]+. Scheme 14
Figure imgf000096_0001
To a solution of (S)-methyl 2-(2-chloro-6-vinylpyrimidine-4- carboxamido)propanoate (0.444 g, 1.65 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) was added 2-(4- (4-fIuorophenoxy)phenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l ,3,2-dioxaborolane (0.521 g, 1.66 mmol), 2M aqueous Na2C03 (1.65 mL, 3.30 mmol), and PdCl2(dppf) (0.071 g, 0.087 mmol). The reaction vessel was flushed with argon, sealed and heated at 100°C overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo and the residue chromatographed over silica gel with 10-40% EtOAc in hexanes. The product fractions were evaporated in vacuo to give (S)-methyl 2-(2-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoate as a tan- yellow oil (0.304 g, 0.72 mmol, 44% yield). LC/MS: m/z= 422.2 [M+H]+.
Scheme 15
Figure imgf000096_0002
Compound Example No. 14
To a warmed milky suspension of (S)-methyl 2-(2-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-vinylpyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoate (0.407 g, 0.966 mmol) in iPrOH (5 mL) and water (5 mL) was added AD-Mix-oc ( 1.328 g). After stirring 2.5 hours the reaction mixture was partitioned between 25 mL water and 50 mL EtOAc. The organic layers were isolated and the aqueous layer extracted once more with 25 mL EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2S0 , filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel using 50-100% EtOAc in hexanes. The product fractions were evaporated in vacuo to give (S)-methyl 2-(6-((S)- l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoate (Compound Example No. 14) as a cream-colored solid (0.236 g, 0.518 mmol, 54% yield). Ή NMR (400 5 MHz, DMSO-d6): 9.39 (1 H, d, J = 7.9 Hz), 8.64 (2 H, d, J = 9.0 Hz), 8.00 ( 1 H, s), 7.33-7.25 (2 H, m), 7.22-7.16 (2 H, m), 7.13 (2 H, d, J = 9.0 Hz), 5.82 (1 H, d, J = 5.3 Hz), 4.83 (1 H, t, J = 6.1 Hz), 4.72-4.60 (2 H, m), 3.85-3.77 (1 H, m), 3.72-3.63 (4 H, m), 1.49 (3 H, d, J = 7.2 Hz); LC/MS: m/z= 456.1 [M+H]+.
Scheme 16
Figure imgf000097_0001
j ø Compound Example No. 15
To a solution of (S)-methyl 2-(6-((S)-l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoate (0.100 g, 0.22 mmol) in 5: 1 THF/water (5 mL) was added LiOH«H20 (0.009 g, 0.21 mmol). After stirring overnight additional LiOH»H20 (0.001 g, 0.02 mmol) was added. After 5 hours the
15 reaction was evaporated in vacuo. To the residue was added 5 mL water and 0.22 mL IN HCl. The resulting precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, and dried under vacuum. The solid was triturated with 2 mL 20% EtOAc/hexanes, isolated, and rinsed with additional hexanes. The material was dried under vacuum to give (S)-2-(6-((S)-l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- 0 carboxamido) propanoic acid (Compound Example No. 15) as an off-white powder (0.062 g, 0.14 mmol, 64% yield). Ή NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 12.82 (1 H, s), 9.23 (1 H, d, J = 7.9 Hz), 8.62 (2 H, d, J = 9.0 Hz), 8.00 (1 H, s), 7.33-7.25 (2 H, m), 7.23-7.16 (2 H, m), 7.13 (2 H, d, J = 8.8 Hz), 5.82 (1 H, d, J = 5.3 Hz), 4.83 ( 1 H, t, J = 5.9 Hz), 4.70 (1 H, q, J = 4.4 Hz), 4.55 (1 H, p, J = 7.5 Hz), 3.84-3.76 (1 H, m), 5 3.71-3.63 (1 H, m), 1.48 (3 H, d, J = 7.2 Hz); LC/MS: m/z= 442.1 [M+H]+. Scheme 17
Figure imgf000098_0001
Compound Example No. 16
To (S)-methyl 2-(6-((S)- 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)pheny 1) pyrimidine-4-carboxamido)propanoate (0.120 g, 0.263 mmol) was added MeOH (2.5 mL) and 7M NH3 in MeOH (2.5 mL, 17.5 mmol). The reaction was sealed, stirred overnight then evaporated in vacuo. MeOH was added and the reaction mixture evaporated again in vacuo. The resulting solid was triturated with 4 mL 20% EtOAc/hexanes, filtered, and rinsed once with 2 mL 20% EtOAc/hexanes. The material was dried under vacuum to give N-((S)- 1 -amino- 1 -oxopropan-2-yl)-6-((S)- l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 16) as a pale peach-colored powder (0.099 g, 0.23 mmol. 87% yield). Ή NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8.99 (1 H, d, J = 7.7 Hz), 8.55 (2 H, d, J = 9.0 Hz), 8.01 (1 H, s), 7.60 (1 H, s), 7.33-7.25 (2 H, m), 7.24-7.17 (3 H, m), 7.14 (2 H, d, J = 8.8 Hz), 5.83 (1 H, d, J = 5.3 Hz), 4.83 (1 H, t, J = 5.9 Hz), 4.70 ( 1 H, q, J = 3.9 Hz), 4.50 (1 H, p, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.84-3.77 (1 H, m), 3.71-3.63 ( 1 H, m), 1.41 (3 H, d, J = 7.0 Hz); LC/MS: m/z= 441.2 [M+H]+.
EXAMPLE 7
Synthesis of (5)-2-(4-(3-cyano-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2- dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 1 1 ) Scheme 18
Cs2C03
Figure imgf000099_0001
28 29
27
A mixture of compound 27 (2.1 g, 10.9 mmol), compound 28 (2.4 g), and Cs2C03 (3.5 g, 10.9 mmol) in DMF (14 mL) was heated at 100°C for 4 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with water (l OOmL) and extracted with EtOAc (3x100 mL). The combined organic layer was washed with brine, concentrated and purified by column chromatography (silica gel,
EtOAc/hexanes 1/1 ) to give (4-(3-cyano-4-trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)boronic acid (29) (pink solid, 42%). Ή NMR (400MHz, CD3OD): 7.59 - 7.86 (3H, m), 7.31 - 7.37 ( 1 H, m), 7.19 - 7.26 (1 H, m), 6.9 - 7.10 (2H, m).
(S)-2-(4-(3-cyano-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-( 1 ,2- dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 1 1 ) was prepared as a white solid using compound 9, compound 29, and the synthetic methodology described in the examples above. Ή NMR (400MHz, CD3OD): 8.61 (2H, d, J = 8.9 Hz), 8.1 (1 H, s), 7.83 (l H,d, J = 8.9 Hz), 7.56 (1 H, d, 2.6 Hz), 7.34 - 7.38 (1 H, m), 7.16 - 7.20 (2H, m), 4.74 - 4.79 (1 H, m), 3.88 - 3.96 (1 H, m), 3.74 - 3.84 (l H, m); LC/MS: m/z = 445.1 [M + H]+.
EXAMPLE 8
Synthesis of (S)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-((5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl)oxy) phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 19) Scheme 19
CS2CO;
Figure imgf000100_0001
30 28 31
A mixture of compound 30 (20 g, 1.05 eq.), compound 28 ( 1.0 eq.) and K2CO3 (2.0 eq.) in DMF/water (300mL/15mL) was heated at 85°C for 14 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with water (200mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3x200 mL). The combined organic layer was washed with brine, concentrated and purified by column chromatography (silica gel,
EtOAc/hexanes 1/1 ) to give (4-((5-trifluoromethyl)pyridine-2- yl)oxy)phenyl)boronic acid (31) ( 1 1 g, pink solid, 35%). Ή NMR (400MHz, CDC13): 8.44 - 8.55 (1 H, m), 8.32 (2H, d, J = 8.55 Hz), 7.92 - 8.02 (1 H, m), 7.30 (2H, d, J = 8.7 Hz), 7.1 1 ( 1 H, d, J = 9.4 Hz).
(S)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-((5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl)oxy)phenyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide (Compound Example No. 19) was prepared as a white solid using compound 9, compound 29, and the synthetic methodology described in the examples above. Ή NMR (400MHz, CD3OD): 8.54 - 8.63 (2H, m), 8.38 (, 1 H, s), 8.0 - 8.1 1 (3H, m), 7.18 - 7.26 (2H, m), 7.07 - 7.16 ( 1 H, m), 4.74 - 4.79 (1 H, m), 3.88 - 3.96 (1 H, m), 3.74 - 3.84 ( 1 H, m); LC/MS: m/z = 421.1 [M + H]+.
EXAMPLE 9
Representative Compounds of the Invention have been tested in the FLIPR®, FLIPRTETRA®, and/or electrophysiology (EP) assays for sodium channel blocking activity, which is described in detail above. Representative values are presented in TABLE 4.
TABLE 4 Evaluation of compounds as sodium channel (Nav) blockers
Figure imgf000101_0001
Having now fully described this disclosure, it will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that the same can be performed within a wide and equivalent range of conditions, formulations and other parameters without affecting the scope of the disclosure or any embodiment thereof. Other embodiments of the disclosure will be apparent to those skilled in the art from consideration of the specification and practice of the invention disclosed herein. It is intended that the specification and examples be considered as exemplary only, with a true scope and spirit of the invention being indicated by the following claims.
All patents and publications cited herein are fully incorporated by reference in their entirety.

Claims

Claims l. A compound having Formula I:
Figure imgf000103_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof,
wherein:
W1 and W2 are N and W3 is CR3; or
W1 and W3 are N and W2 is CR3; or
W2 and W3 are N and W1 is CR3;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; cycloalkyl, aralkyl; (heterocyclo)alkyl; (heteroaryl)alkyl; (amino)alkyl; (alkylamino)alkyl;
(dialkylamino)alkyl; carboxyalkyl; (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl; (carboxamido)alkyl; (cyano)alkyl; alkoxyalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; and heteroalkyl; wherein the alkyl and the cycloalkyl group may optionally be substituted;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or R1 and R2 taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a 3- to 8-membered optionally substituted heterocyclo;
R3 selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino; alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; and alkoxyalkyl;
R4 is C2-6 dihydroxyalkyl; A1 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
X is selected from the group consisting of -0-; -S-; -SO-; -S02-; -(CR5aR5b)m-;
-NR6-; -S02NR7-; and -NR7S02-; each R5a and R5b, which can be identical or different, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; halo; and alkyl; m is 0, 1 , 2, or 3 ;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; and
A2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl.
2. The compound of claim 1 having Formula II:
Figure imgf000104_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, wherein:
R8a and R8b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino; alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; carboxy; and alkoxycarbonyl.
3. The compound of claim 1 or 2 havin Formula III:
Figure imgf000105_0001
harmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
4. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 3, wherein:
X is selected from the group consisting of -0-; -S-; -S02-; -(CH2)m-; and -NH-; and m is 0 or 1 ,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
5. The compound of an one of claims 1 - 4 having Formula IV:
Figure imgf000105_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
6. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 5, wherein A 1 is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000105_0003
A1-2 A1-3 A -4
J
wherein;
R9a, R9b, R, 0a, RI Ob, Rl l a, Rl l b, R, 2a, and Rl 2b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; halo; nitro; cyano; hydroxy; amino; alkylamino; dialkylamino; haloalkyl; monohydroxyalkyl; dihydroxyalkyl; alkoxy; haloalkoxy; carboxy; and alkoxycarbonyl,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
7. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 6, wherein:
W1 and W2 are N and W3 is CR3; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C | .4 alkyl,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
8. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 6, wherein:
W1 and W3 are N and W2 is CR3; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C m alkyl,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
9. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 6, wherein:
W2 and W3 are N and W' is CR3; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C | .4 alkyl,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
10. The compound of any one of claims 2 - 9, wherein R8a and R8b are hydrogen, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
1 1 . The compound of any one of claims 1 - 10, wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; alkyl; carboxyalkyl; (alkoxycarbonyl)alkyl; and (carboxamido)alkyl; and
R2 is hydrogen,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
I
12. The compound of claim 1 1 , wherein R and R are each hydrogen,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
13. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 12, wherein R4 is a 4 dihydroxyalkyl,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
14. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 13, wherein R4 is selected from group consistin of:
Figure imgf000107_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
15. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 14, wherein R4 is:
Figure imgf000107_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
16. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 14, wherein R is:
OH
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
17. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 7, 10 - 14, and 16 having Formula V:
Figure imgf000108_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
18. The compound of ny one of claims 1 - 7, and 10 - 15 having Formula VI:
Figure imgf000108_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
1 . The compound of any one of claims 1 - 6, 8, 10 - 14 and 16 having Formula VII:
Figure imgf000108_0003
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
20. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 6, 8, and 10 - 15 having Formula VIII:
Figure imgf000109_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
21. The compound of any one of claims 6 - 20, wherein A 1 is selected from the group consisting of A 1 - ! and A '-2,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
22. The compound of any one of claims 6 - 21 , wherein A 1 is A ' - I ,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
23. The compound of any one of claims 1 - 22, wherein R3 is hydrogen.
24. The compound of claim 1 selected from the group consisting of:
(S)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide;
(R)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide;
(S)-2-(4-(4-cyanophenoxy)phenyl-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide; (R)-2-(4-(4-cyanophenoxy)phenyl-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide; (S)-2-(4-(4-cyano-2-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide;
(R)-2-(4-(4-cyano-2-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide;
(R)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide; (S)-2-(4-(5-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide;
(R)-2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide;
(S)-2-(4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)-6-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide;
(S)-2-(4-(3-cyano-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide;
(R)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide;
(S)-2-(4-(4-cyano-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide;
(S)-methyl 2-(6-((S)-l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl) pyrimidine- 4-carboxamido) propanoate;
(S)-2-(6-((S)- 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamido)propanoic acid;
N-((S)- 1 -amino- 1 -oxopropan-2-yl)-6-((S)- 1 ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4- fluorophenoxy) phenyl)pyrimidine-4-carboxamide;
(S)-6-(l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide;
(R)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)phenyl)pyrimidine-4- carboxamide;
(S)-6-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-2-(4-((5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)oxy)phenyl) pyrimidine-4-carboxamide;
(R)-4-( l ,2-dihydroxyethyl)-6-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl) pyrimidine-2- carboxamide;
and
(S)-4-( 1 ,2-dihydroxyethy l)-6-(4-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl) pyrimidine-2- carboxamide,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
25. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
26. A method of treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium channels in a mammal suffering from said disorder, comprising administering to a mammal in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound as claimed in of any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein a disorder responsive to the blockade of TTX resistant sodium channels is treated.
28. The method of claim 26, wherein a disorder responsive to the blockade of TTX sensitive sodium channels is treated.
29. The method of claim 26, wherein a disorder responsive to the blockade of Nav l .7 sodium channels is treated.
30. A method for treating stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, pain, migraine, primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, mental retardation, a neurodegenerative disorder, manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia in a mammal, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound as claimed in of any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, to a mammal in need of such treatment.
31 . The method of claim 30, wherein said method is for treating pain.
32. The method of claim 30 and 31 , wherein said method is for preemptive or palliative treatment of pain.
33. The method of claim 30 and 3 1 , wherein said pain is selected from the group consisting of chronic pain, inflammatory pain, neuropathic pain, acute pain, and surgical pain.
34. A method of modulating sodium channels in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal at least one compound as claimed in of any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.
35. The method of claim 34, wherein the Nav l .7 sodium channel is modulated.
36. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising the compound as claimed in of any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, for treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium ion channels.
37. A compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, for use in treating a disorder responsive to the blockade of sodium ion channels.
38. The compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, wherein the compound is 3H, "C, or l 4C radiolabeled.
39. A method of screening a candidate compound for the ability to bind to a binding site on a protein using a radiolabeled compound of any one of claims 1 - 24, comprising: a) introducing a fixed concentration of the radiolabeled compound to a soluble or membrane-associated protein or fragment thereof to form a mixture;
b) titrating the mixture with a candidate compound; and
c) determining the binding of the candidate compound to said binding site.
40. A method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, comprising admixing a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of any one of claims 1 - 24, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug, or solvate thereof, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
41. Compound according to any one of claims 1 - 24 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof for use in the treatment of stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, pain, migraine, primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, mental retardation, a neurodegenerative disorder, manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia.
42. The compound for use according to claim 41 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof in the treatment of pain.
43. The compound for use according to claim 41 or 42 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof wherein the pain is selected from preemptive or palliative treatment of pain.
44. The compound for use of any one of claims 41 - 43 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, wherein said pain is selected from the group consisting of chronic pain, inflammatory pain, neuropathic pain, acute pain, and surgical pain.
45. Use of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof of any one of claims 1 - 24 in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of stroke, neuronal damage resulting from head trauma, epilepsy, seizures, neuronal loss following global and focal ischemia, pain, migraine, primary erythromelalgia, paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, cerebellar atrophy, ataxia, mental retardation, a neurodegenerative disorder, manic depression, tinnitus, myotonia, a movement disorder, or cardiac arrhythmia, or providing local anesthesia.
46. Use according to claim 45 wherein the condition is pain.
47. Use according to claim 45 or 46 wherein the pain is selected from preemptive or palliative treatment of pain.
48. Use according to any one of claims 45 - 47, wherein the pain is selected from the group consisting of chronic pain, inflammatory pain, neuropathic pain, acute pain, and surgical pain.
PCT/IB2012/002504 2011-11-15 2012-11-14 Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers WO2013072758A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2012327195A AU2012327195B8 (en) 2011-11-15 2012-11-14 Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers
US14/358,155 US9133131B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2012-11-14 Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers
US14/817,984 US9539253B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2015-08-04 Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201161560092P 2011-11-15 2011-11-15
US61/560,092 2011-11-15

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/358,155 A-371-Of-International US9133131B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2012-11-14 Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers
US14/817,984 Division US9539253B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2015-08-04 Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013072758A1 true WO2013072758A1 (en) 2013-05-23

Family

ID=47326227

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2012/002504 WO2013072758A1 (en) 2011-11-15 2012-11-14 Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US9133131B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2013072758A1 (en)

Cited By (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9056832B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2015-06-16 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine compounds and the users thereof
US9120752B2 (en) 2010-07-16 2015-09-01 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Pyridine compounds as sodium channel blockers
US9120786B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2015-09-01 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Triazine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
WO2016007534A1 (en) * 2014-07-07 2016-01-14 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
JP2016512840A (en) * 2013-03-15 2016-05-09 パーデュー、ファーマ、リミテッド、パートナーシップ Carboxamide derivatives and uses thereof
US9481677B2 (en) 2011-10-31 2016-11-01 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Biaryl ether sulfonamides and their use as therapeutic agents
US9493429B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-11-15 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzoxazoles and methods of use thereof
US20160332992A1 (en) * 2013-12-20 2016-11-17 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyrimidines and use thereof
US9546164B2 (en) 2013-11-27 2017-01-17 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US9550775B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-01-24 Genentech, Inc. Substituted triazolopyridines and methods of use thereof
US9630929B2 (en) 2011-10-31 2017-04-25 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US9637458B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2017-05-02 Jeffrey Lockman Pyrimidine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
US9714252B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2017-07-25 Purdue Pharma L.P. Cyclic sulfonamides as sodium channel blockers
US9718780B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2017-08-01 Purdue Pharma L.P. Substituted pyridines as sodium channel blockers
US9763955B2 (en) 2015-02-19 2017-09-19 Purdue Pharma L.P. Methods and compositions for decreasing gastric emptying
US9771376B2 (en) 2000-05-22 2017-09-26 Genentech, Inc. N-substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US10071957B2 (en) 2012-07-06 2018-09-11 Genentech, Inc. N-substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US10179767B2 (en) 2015-05-22 2019-01-15 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US10457654B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2019-10-29 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10766858B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2020-09-08 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US10787446B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-09-29 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10899732B2 (en) 2015-11-25 2021-01-26 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides useful as sodium channel blockers
US10947251B2 (en) 2018-03-30 2021-03-16 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11028075B2 (en) 2018-02-26 2021-06-08 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11046658B2 (en) 2018-07-02 2021-06-29 Incyte Corporation Aminopyrazine derivatives as PI3K-γ inhibitors
US11130726B2 (en) 2015-08-27 2021-09-28 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11926616B2 (en) 2018-03-08 2024-03-12 Incyte Corporation Aminopyrazine diol compounds as PI3K-γ inhibitors

Families Citing this family (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2582666B1 (en) 2010-06-16 2014-08-13 Purdue Pharma L.P. Aryl substituted indoles and their use as blockers of sodium channels
PL2619212T3 (en) 2010-09-21 2016-09-30 Buprenorphine analogs as opioid receptor agonists and/or antagonists
US9045435B2 (en) 2010-10-05 2015-06-02 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Quinazoline compounds as sodium channel blockers
CN103429571A (en) 2010-12-22 2013-12-04 普渡制药公司 Substituted pyridines as sodium channel blockers
SI2753606T1 (en) 2011-09-02 2017-10-30 Purdue Pharma Lp Pyrimidines as sodium channel blockers
AU2012324010A1 (en) 2011-10-31 2013-05-16 Purdue Pharma L.P. Heteroaryl compounds as sodium channel blockers
AU2012321111A1 (en) 2011-10-31 2013-05-16 Purdue Pharma L.P. Quaternized amines as sodium channel blockers
WO2013072758A1 (en) 2011-11-15 2013-05-23 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers
US10138207B2 (en) 2012-11-09 2018-11-27 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Benzomorphan analogs and the use thereof
US9359330B2 (en) 2013-08-26 2016-06-07 Purdue Pharma L.P. Substituted piperidines as sodium channel blockers
WO2015031036A1 (en) 2013-08-26 2015-03-05 Purdue Pharma L.P. Azaspiro[4.5] decane derivatives and use thereof
US9828348B2 (en) 2013-11-08 2017-11-28 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzimidazole derivatives and use thereof
US9340504B2 (en) 2013-11-21 2016-05-17 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine and piperidine derivatives as novel sodium channel blockers
US9695144B2 (en) 2013-12-23 2017-07-04 Purdue Pharma L.P. Dibenzazepine derivatives and use thereof
EP3087059B1 (en) 2013-12-23 2020-04-29 Purdue Pharma L.P. Indazoles and use thereof
EP3089978B1 (en) 2013-12-30 2018-08-29 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridone-sulfone morphinan analogs as opioid receptor ligands
US10047075B2 (en) 2014-01-24 2018-08-14 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridines and pyrimidines and use thereof
AU2015217185B2 (en) 2014-02-12 2018-04-05 Purdue Pharma L.P. Isoquinoline derivatives and use thereof
US10730866B2 (en) 2014-04-07 2020-08-04 Purdue Pharma L.P. Indole derivatives and use thereof
CA2948144A1 (en) 2014-05-06 2015-11-12 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzomorphan analogs and use thereof
CA2952124A1 (en) 2014-06-13 2015-12-17 Purdue Pharma L.P. Heterocyclic morphinan derivatives and use thereof
EP3154972A4 (en) 2014-06-13 2017-11-22 Purdue Pharma L.P. Azamophinan derivatives and use thereof
WO2018125716A1 (en) 2017-01-02 2018-07-05 Purdue Pharma L.P. Morphinan derivatives and use thereof
JP2020511511A (en) 2017-03-24 2020-04-16 ジェネンテック， インコーポレイテッド 4-Piperidin-N- (pyrimidin-4-yl) chroman-7-sulfonamide derivatives as sodium channel inhibitors
EP3696165A1 (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-19 BASF Agro B.V. Process for the preparation of 4-halophenoxy-2-trifluoromethyl benzonitrile
EP3696159A1 (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-19 BASF Agro B.V. Process for the preparation of substituted phenoxyphenyl ketones
EP3696164A1 (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-19 BASF Agro B.V. Process for the preparation of 4-nitro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-benzonitrile

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6136839A (en) 1995-06-12 2000-10-24 G. D. Searle & Co. Treatment of inflammation and inflammation-related disorders with a combination of a cyclooxygenase-2 inhibitor and a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor
WO2001068612A2 (en) * 2000-03-10 2001-09-20 Euro-Celtique S.A. Aryl substituted pyridines, pyrimidines, pyrazines and triazines and the use thereof
WO2004084824A2 (en) * 2003-03-24 2004-10-07 Merck & Co., Inc. Biaryl substituted 6-membered heterocyles as sodium channel blockers
WO2009110985A2 (en) * 2008-02-29 2009-09-11 Renovis, Inc. Amide compounds, compositions and uses thereof
WO2010051188A1 (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-05-06 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. P2x3, receptor antagonists for treatment of pain
WO2012035421A2 (en) * 2010-09-17 2012-03-22 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine compounds and the uses thereof

Family Cites Families (44)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ATE289295T1 (en) 1997-04-22 2005-03-15 Euro Celtique Sa THE USE OF SEMICARBAZONES AND THIOSEMICARBAZONES SUBSTITUTED BY CARBOCYCLIC AND HETEROCYCLIC MATERIALS AS SODIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS
CA2310664C (en) 1997-11-21 2008-03-11 Euro-Celtique S.A. Substituted 2-aminoacetamides and the use thereof
US6281211B1 (en) 1999-02-04 2001-08-28 Euro-Celtique S.A. Substituted semicarbazides and the use thereof
TR200102790T2 (en) 1999-03-26 2002-06-21 Euro-Celtique S.A. Aryl Substituted Pyrazoles, Imidazoles, Oxazoles, Thiazoles and Pyrroles and Their Use.
JP2002541215A (en) 1999-04-09 2002-12-03 ユーロ−セルティック エス． ア． Sodium channel blocker compositions and uses thereof
ES2398093T3 (en) 2000-03-24 2013-03-13 Euro-Celtique S.A. Arzo substituted pyrazoles, triazoles and tetrazoles as sodium channel blockers
US6335354B2 (en) 2000-03-31 2002-01-01 Cocensys Inc. Aminopyridines and methods of using thereof
CA2453633A1 (en) 2001-07-16 2003-01-30 Euro-Celtique S.A. Aryl substituted thiazolidinones and the use thereof
AR036873A1 (en) 2001-09-07 2004-10-13 Euro Celtique Sa PIRIDINAS ARIL REPLACED A, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND THE USE OF THE SAME FOR THE PREPARATION OF A MEDICINAL PRODUCT
AR037233A1 (en) 2001-09-07 2004-11-03 Euro Celtique Sa PIRIDINAS ARIL REPLACED, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND THE USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS FOR THE PREPARATION OF A MEDICINAL PRODUCT
ATE434610T1 (en) 2002-03-13 2009-07-15 Euro Celtique Sa ARYL SUBSTITUTED PYRIMIDINES AND THEIR USE
BR0313352A (en) 2002-07-31 2005-07-12 Euro Celtique Sa Compound, pharmaceutical compositions, method for producing a compound, method for treating, preventing or ameliorating a disorder and method for treating a mammal
BR0313084A (en) 2002-07-31 2005-06-28 Euro Celtique Sa Compound, pharmaceutical composition, method for producing a compound, method of treating, preventing or ameliorating a disorder, and method of treating a mammal
US20040152696A1 (en) 2002-08-01 2004-08-05 Euro-Celtique S.A. 2-substituted bicyclic benzoheterocyclic compounds and their use as sodium channel blockers
WO2004050857A2 (en) 2002-12-04 2004-06-17 Euro-Celtique S.A. Splice variant of human sodium iii channel (hnaiii18)
WO2004052862A1 (en) 2002-12-10 2004-06-24 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds and medicinal use thereof
WO2005014849A2 (en) 2003-07-03 2005-02-17 Euro-Celtique, S.A. Genes associated with responses to neuropathic pain
US20050282824A1 (en) 2004-05-07 2005-12-22 Xiaobing Li Substituted pyrimidines as inhibitors of bacterial type III protein secretion systems
TW200616974A (en) 2004-07-01 2006-06-01 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
US8952001B2 (en) 2009-12-22 2015-02-10 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Amino-heteroaryl derivatives as HCN blockers
EP2382865A1 (en) 2010-04-28 2011-11-02 Bayer CropScience AG Synergistic active agent compounds
EP2582666B1 (en) 2010-06-16 2014-08-13 Purdue Pharma L.P. Aryl substituted indoles and their use as blockers of sodium channels
US9120752B2 (en) 2010-07-16 2015-09-01 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Pyridine compounds as sodium channel blockers
US9045435B2 (en) 2010-10-05 2015-06-02 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Quinazoline compounds as sodium channel blockers
CN103429571A (en) 2010-12-22 2013-12-04 普渡制药公司 Substituted pyridines as sodium channel blockers
SI2753606T1 (en) 2011-09-02 2017-10-30 Purdue Pharma Lp Pyrimidines as sodium channel blockers
AU2012324010A1 (en) 2011-10-31 2013-05-16 Purdue Pharma L.P. Heteroaryl compounds as sodium channel blockers
AU2012321111A1 (en) 2011-10-31 2013-05-16 Purdue Pharma L.P. Quaternized amines as sodium channel blockers
WO2013072758A1 (en) 2011-11-15 2013-05-23 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers
AU2013203824A1 (en) 2012-03-16 2013-10-03 Purdue Pharma L.P. Substituted pyridines and pryimidines as sodium channel blockers
US9718865B2 (en) 2012-07-27 2017-08-01 Purdue Pharma L.P. Sodium channel blocking peptides and the use thereof
US9714252B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2017-07-25 Purdue Pharma L.P. Cyclic sulfonamides as sodium channel blockers
US9120786B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2015-09-01 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Triazine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
ES2859148T3 (en) 2013-03-04 2021-10-01 Purdue Pharma Lp Pyrimidine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
EP2968307A4 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-01-04 Purdue Pharma LP Carboxamide derivatives and use thereof
WO2015031036A1 (en) 2013-08-26 2015-03-05 Purdue Pharma L.P. Azaspiro[4.5] decane derivatives and use thereof
US9359330B2 (en) 2013-08-26 2016-06-07 Purdue Pharma L.P. Substituted piperidines as sodium channel blockers
US9828348B2 (en) 2013-11-08 2017-11-28 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzimidazole derivatives and use thereof
US9340504B2 (en) 2013-11-21 2016-05-17 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine and piperidine derivatives as novel sodium channel blockers
EP3083606B1 (en) 2013-12-20 2020-10-28 Purdue Pharma LP Pyrimidines and use thereof
EP3087059B1 (en) 2013-12-23 2020-04-29 Purdue Pharma L.P. Indazoles and use thereof
CN106414408A (en) 2013-12-26 2017-02-15 普渡制药公司 Ring-contracted morphinans and the use thereof
US10047075B2 (en) 2014-01-24 2018-08-14 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridines and pyrimidines and use thereof
US10730866B2 (en) 2014-04-07 2020-08-04 Purdue Pharma L.P. Indole derivatives and use thereof

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6136839A (en) 1995-06-12 2000-10-24 G. D. Searle & Co. Treatment of inflammation and inflammation-related disorders with a combination of a cyclooxygenase-2 inhibitor and a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor
WO2001068612A2 (en) * 2000-03-10 2001-09-20 Euro-Celtique S.A. Aryl substituted pyridines, pyrimidines, pyrazines and triazines and the use thereof
WO2004084824A2 (en) * 2003-03-24 2004-10-07 Merck & Co., Inc. Biaryl substituted 6-membered heterocyles as sodium channel blockers
WO2009110985A2 (en) * 2008-02-29 2009-09-11 Renovis, Inc. Amide compounds, compositions and uses thereof
WO2010051188A1 (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-05-06 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. P2x3, receptor antagonists for treatment of pain
WO2012035421A2 (en) * 2010-09-17 2012-03-22 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine compounds and the uses thereof

Non-Patent Citations (55)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Physical and Biomedical Sciences", vol. 1, 1987
A.L. BINGHAM ET AL., CHEM. COMMUN., 2001, pages 603 - 604
ANGER ET AL., J. MED. CHEM., vol. 44, 2001, pages 115 - 137
BAKER ET AL., TRENDS IN PHARMACOLOGICAL SCIENCES, vol. 22, 2001, pages 27 - 31
BARTHO ET AL., NAUNYN-SCHMIEDEBERG'S ARCHIVES OF PHARMACOL, vol. 342, 1990, pages 666 - 670
BENJAMIN, J. BIOMOL. SCREEN, vol. 10, no. 4, 2005, pages 365 - 373
BIOCHEMISTRY & BEHAVIOR, vol. 31, 1988, pages 451 - 455
BLACK ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 97, 2000, pages 11598 - 115602
BROWER, NATURE BIOTECHNOLOGY, vol. 18, 2000, pages 387 - 391
BROWN ET AL., BRITISH J. PHARMACOL., vol. 115, 1995, pages 1425 - 1432
BUNDGAARD ET AL., ADV. DRUG DELIVERY REVS., vol. 8, 1992, pages 1 - 38
BUNDGAARD ET AL., J. PHARMACEUT. SCI., vol. 77, 1988, pages 285
BUNDGAARD: "Design and Application of Prodrugs", pages: 113 - 191
CANNON, KIDNEY INT., vol. 57, 2000, pages 772 - 779
CATTERALL, TRENDS PHARMACOL. SCI, vol. 8, 1987, pages 57 - 65
CHAHINE ET AL., CNS & NEUROLOGICAL DISORDERS-DRUG TARGETS, vol. 7, 2008, pages 144 - 158
CLARE ET AL., DRUG DISCOVERY TODAY, vol. 5, 2000, pages 506 - 510
CUMMINS ET AL., J. NEUROSCI, vol. 18, no. 23, 1998, pages 9607 - 9619
DONALDSON, LARYNGOL. OTOL., vol. 95, 1981, pages 947 - 951
E.C. VAN TONDER ET AL., AAPS PHARM. SCI. TECH., vol. 5, no. 1, 2004, pages 12
GLEN R. HANSON: "Analgesic, Antipyretic and Anti Inflammatory Drugs in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy,19th ed.", vol. II, 1995, pages: 1196 - 1221
GRAHAM ET AL., J. PHARMACOL. EXP. THER., vol. 269, 1994, pages 854 - 859
H. BUNDGAARD: "Design of Prodrugs", 1985, ELSEVIER
HANKS ET AL., PROC. SOC. EXP. BIOL. MED., vol. 71, 1949, pages 196
HAROOTUNIAN ET AL., J. BIOL. CHEM., vol. 264, no. 32, 1989, pages 19458 - 19467
HUBNER ET AL., HUM. MOL. GENET, vol. 11, 2002, pages 2435 - 2445
HUNSKAAR ET AL., J. NEUROSCI. METHODS, vol. 14, 1985, pages 69 - 76
ILYIN ET AL., BR. J. PHARMACOL, vol. 144, 2005, pages 801 - 812
K. WIDDER ET AL.: "Methods in Enzymology", vol. 112, 1985, ACADEMIC PRESS, article "Drug and Enzyme Targeting, Part A"
KAKEYA ET AL., CHEM. PHARM. BULL., vol. 32, 1984, pages 692
KEARNEY, J. CLIN. INVEST, vol. 115, 2005, pages 2010 - 2017
KIM ET AL., PAIN, vol. 50, no. 3, 1992, pages 355 - 363
KYLE; ILYIN, J. MED. CHEM., vol. 50, 2007, pages 2583 - 2588
KYLE; ILYIN., J. MED. CHEM., vol. 50, 2007, pages 2583 - 2588
LAI ET AL., ANNU. REV. PHARMACOL. TOXICOL., vol. 44, 2004, pages 371 - 397
LAI ET AL., CURRENT OPINION IN NEUROBIOLOGY, vol. 13, 2003, pages 291 - 297
LAIRD ET AL., J. NEUROSCI, vol. 22, 2002, pages 8352 - 8356
LIU ET AL., AM. J. PHARMACOGENOMICS, vol. 3, 2003, pages 173 - 179
M. CAIRA ET AL., J. PHARMACEUT. SCI., vol. 93, no. 3, 2004, pages 601 - 611
MAJUMDAR, B. ET AL., CLIN. OTOLARYNGOL, vol. 8, 1983, pages 175 - 180
MOLLER, AM. J. OTOL., vol. 18, 1997, pages 577 - 585
NASSAR ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 101, 2004, pages 12706 - 12711
NOBLE, PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 99, 2002, pages 5755 - 5756
P. KROGSGAARD-LARSEN AND H. BUNDGAARD: "A Textbook of Drug Design and Development", 1991, HARWOOD ACADEMIC PUBLISHERS
PAUL A. INSEL: "Goodman & Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics", 1996, article "Analgesic Antipyretic and Antiinflammatory Agents and Drugs Employed in the Treatment of Gout", pages: 617 - 57
SELTZER ET AL., PAIN, vol. 43, 1990, pages 205 - 218
SIMPSON ET AL., TIP., vol. 20, 1999, pages 12 - 18
SRIVATSA ET AL., CURR. CARDIOL. REP., vol. 4, 2002, pages 401 - 410
TAYLOR; MELDRUM, TRENDS PHARMACOL. SCI, vol. 16, 1995, pages 309 - 316
TOLEDO-ARAL ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 94, 1997, pages 1527 - 1532
TONNDORF, HEAR. RES., vol. 28, 1987, pages 271 - 275
VALENTINA ZULIANI ET AL: "Sodium channel blockers for neuropathic pain", EXPERT OPINION ON THERAPEUTIC PATENTS, INFORMA HEALTHCARE, GB, vol. 20, no. 6, 1 January 2010 (2010-01-01), pages 755 - 779, XP009152755, ISSN: 1354-3776 *
WALL AND MELZACK: "Textbook of Pain, 3rd ed.,", 1994, article LEVINE: "Inflammatory Pain"
WOOD ET AL., J. NEUROBIOL., vol. 61, 2004, pages 55 - 71
YOGEESWARI ET AL., CURR. DRUG TARGET, vol. 5, 2004, pages 589 - 602

Cited By (46)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9771376B2 (en) 2000-05-22 2017-09-26 Genentech, Inc. N-substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US9765029B2 (en) 2010-07-16 2017-09-19 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine compounds as sodium channel blockers
US9120752B2 (en) 2010-07-16 2015-09-01 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Pyridine compounds as sodium channel blockers
US9611222B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2017-04-04 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine compounds and the uses thereof
US9056832B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2015-06-16 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyridine compounds and the users thereof
US9481677B2 (en) 2011-10-31 2016-11-01 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Biaryl ether sulfonamides and their use as therapeutic agents
US9630929B2 (en) 2011-10-31 2017-04-25 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US9718780B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2017-08-01 Purdue Pharma L.P. Substituted pyridines as sodium channel blockers
US10071957B2 (en) 2012-07-06 2018-09-11 Genentech, Inc. N-substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US9714252B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2017-07-25 Purdue Pharma L.P. Cyclic sulfonamides as sodium channel blockers
US10000475B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2018-06-19 Purdue Pharma L.P. Triazine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
US10196364B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2019-02-05 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyrimidine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
US9120786B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2015-09-01 Purdue Pharma, L.P. Triazine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
US9637458B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2017-05-02 Jeffrey Lockman Pyrimidine carboxamides as sodium channel blockers
US9550775B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-01-24 Genentech, Inc. Substituted triazolopyridines and methods of use thereof
US9493429B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-11-15 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzoxazoles and methods of use thereof
US10005768B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2018-06-26 Purdue Pharma L.P. Carboxamide derivatives and use thereof
AU2014235063B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2017-05-04 Purdue Pharma L.P. Carboxamide derivatives and use thereof
EP3666274A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2020-06-17 Purdue Pharma LP Carboxamide derivatives and use thereof
JP2019070032A (en) * 2013-03-15 2019-05-09 パーデュー、ファーマ、リミテッド、パートナーシップ Carboxamide derivatives and use thereof
EP2968307A4 (en) * 2013-03-15 2017-01-04 Purdue Pharma LP Carboxamide derivatives and use thereof
US20170096421A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2017-04-06 Purdue Pharma L.P. Carboxamide Derivatives and Use Thereof
JP2018012701A (en) * 2013-03-15 2018-01-25 パーデュー、ファーマ、リミテッド、パートナーシップ Carboxamide derivatives and use thereof
JP2016512840A (en) * 2013-03-15 2016-05-09 パーデュー、ファーマ、リミテッド、パートナーシップ Carboxamide derivatives and uses thereof
US9694002B2 (en) 2013-11-27 2017-07-04 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US9546164B2 (en) 2013-11-27 2017-01-17 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US20160332992A1 (en) * 2013-12-20 2016-11-17 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyrimidines and use thereof
US9745287B2 (en) * 2013-12-20 2017-08-29 Purdue Pharma L.P. Pyrimidines and use thereof
WO2016007534A1 (en) * 2014-07-07 2016-01-14 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10125098B2 (en) 2014-07-07 2018-11-13 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11149002B2 (en) 2014-07-07 2021-10-19 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10526285B2 (en) 2014-07-07 2020-01-07 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10005724B2 (en) 2014-07-07 2018-06-26 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10143696B2 (en) 2015-02-19 2018-12-04 Purdue Pharma L.P. Methods and compositions for decreasing gastric emptying
US9763955B2 (en) 2015-02-19 2017-09-19 Purdue Pharma L.P. Methods and compositions for decreasing gastric emptying
US10179767B2 (en) 2015-05-22 2019-01-15 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US11130726B2 (en) 2015-08-27 2021-09-28 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10787446B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-09-29 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10899732B2 (en) 2015-11-25 2021-01-26 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides useful as sodium channel blockers
US10766858B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2020-09-08 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US11203572B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2021-12-21 Genentech, Inc. Substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof
US10457654B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2019-10-29 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11028075B2 (en) 2018-02-26 2021-06-08 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11926616B2 (en) 2018-03-08 2024-03-12 Incyte Corporation Aminopyrazine diol compounds as PI3K-γ inhibitors
US10947251B2 (en) 2018-03-30 2021-03-16 Genentech, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11046658B2 (en) 2018-07-02 2021-06-29 Incyte Corporation Aminopyrazine derivatives as PI3K-γ inhibitors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20140315783A1 (en) 2014-10-23
AU2012327195A8 (en) 2016-10-13
AU2012327195B2 (en) 2016-09-29
US9133131B2 (en) 2015-09-15
US9539253B2 (en) 2017-01-10
AU2012327195A1 (en) 2013-05-30
US20150335642A1 (en) 2015-11-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9539253B2 (en) Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers
US9975858B2 (en) Benzimidazole derivatives and use thereof
US10774050B2 (en) Pyrimidines as sodium channel blockers
US9718780B2 (en) Substituted pyridines as sodium channel blockers
US9388137B2 (en) Quaternized amines as sodium channel blockers
US9340504B2 (en) Pyridine and piperidine derivatives as novel sodium channel blockers
US9611222B2 (en) Pyridine compounds and the uses thereof
EP2655330B1 (en) Substituted pyridines as sodium channel blockers
EP2593434A1 (en) Pyridine compounds as sodium channel blockers
AU2012327195B8 (en) Pyrimidine diol amides as sodium channel blockers

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2012327195

Country of ref document: AU

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12798829

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 14358155

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12798829

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1